{"title":"Templates for Limited Liability Companies","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis broad collection contains documents for Swedish limited companies covering governance, contracts, capital, HR, accounting and ongoing administration.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompare the options below. The product title shows the document type; open the product for full contents, formats and intended use.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"kontrollbalansrakning-mall-utan-revisor","title":"Control Balance Sheet without Auditor – Excel Template + English Version + Guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eControl Balance Sheet for Swedish limited companies without an appointed auditor\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete digital template package featuring Swedish and English Excel templates as well as detailed user guides. The workbook helps the board of directors structure recorded values, permitted control balance sheet (KBR) adjustments, capital adequacy assessments, documentation, and signatures in accordance with Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 4, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eDesigned based on Chapter 25 of the Swedish Companies Act, applicable annual accounts regulations, and generally accepted accounting principles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish Excel template\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eComplete KBR workbook in XLSX.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Excel template\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version for use under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed guidance in Word and PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed English guide in Word and PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDigital delivery\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eAll files are delivered combined in a ZIP package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen should a control balance sheet be prepared?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe board must \u003cstrong\u003eimmediately\u003c\/strong\u003e prepare a control balance sheet when there is \u003cstrong\u003ereason to assume\u003c\/strong\u003e that the company's equity, calculated according to the control balance sheet rules, is less than half of the registered share capital. The obligation may therefore arise before the capital deficiency is definitively established.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA control balance sheet must also be prepared when an attempt to levy execution shows that the company lacks sufficient assets to fully pay the debt under execution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the new Excel template helps you with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate fields for recorded values and KBR adjustments,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eautomatic calculation of KBR values,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eautomatic balance check,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecapital test against half of the registered share capital for the first assessment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecapital test against the full registered share capital before the second meeting of creditors,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate specification of each KBR adjustment and its supporting documentation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ehandling of equity portions and deferred tax liabilities for untaxed reserves,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eboard signature page,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esource sheet with relevant official legal sources.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eKBR adjustments – not an ordinary balance sheet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA control balance sheet is based on the company's regular accounts, but specific adjustments can be made within the framework of the Swedish Companies Act. Among other things, assets may, under certain conditions, be recorded at higher values, provisions and liabilities at lower values, assets valued at net selling price, and untaxed reserves divided between equity and deferred tax liability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore has a separate sheet to document \u003cstrong\u003ewhich item is being adjusted, the amount, the valuation basis, the justification, and supporting evidence\u003c\/strong\u003e. The formulas serve as a working aid – the board is responsible for ensuring that every valuation is correct and consistent with generally accepted accounting principles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFirst and second meeting of creditors\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the control balance sheet shows that equity is less than half of the registered share capital, the board must convene the first meeting of creditors as soon as possible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the capital is not fully restored and the meeting does not decide on liquidation, the control balance sheet process continues. A second meeting of creditors should normally be held within eight months. Prior to the second meeting of creditors, full restoration to at least the registered share capital is required for the company to be able to exit the control balance sheet process without liquidation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #f0c7b0;border-radius:12px;background:#fff7f2\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant regarding the \"without auditor\" product\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis version is intended for Swedish limited companies that \u003cstrong\u003edo not have an appointed auditor\u003c\/strong\u003e. If the company has an auditor, the auditor must review the control balance sheet. The product should not be used as a means to circumvent a required auditor review.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish and English Excel templates have equivalent structures. The English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – it is not intended as a template according to British, American, or other foreign corporate law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide walks you through step-by-step when the board must act, how to fill in each sheet of the workbook, how to document KBR adjustments, the meetings of creditors, full restoration of share capital, personal payment liability, a practical checklist, and frequently asked questions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho is this template for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esmaller and owner-managed Swedish limited companies without an appointed auditor,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eboards that need to investigate suspected capital deficiency,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebusiness owners and accounting consultants who want a structured working document,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecompanies that need to document KBR adjustments and capital tests clearly.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e XLSX, DOCX, and PDF.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download in ZIP format. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/blogs\/kontrollbalansrakning-information-och-vagledning\/kontrollbalansrakning-vardering-av-poster\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRead more about the valuation of items in a control balance sheet →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need an auditor to use the template?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe product is developed for companies without an appointed auditor. If the company has an auditor, they must review the control balance sheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Excel template automatically determine if the company must be liquidated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The capital test is a control and calculation aid. The board must personally ensure that accounting, valuations, deadlines, and other legal requirements are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the English version in a Swedish company?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The English version is the same type of working material but in English, and is explicitly adapted to Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for the second meeting of creditors?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. On the START sheet, you can select the control stage, and the capital test will then switch from half of the share capital to a requirement for at least the full registered share capital.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a practical document and calculation aid and does not replace individual legal or accounting advice. In cases of complex valuations, unclear timing of capital deficiency, or a risk of missed deadlines, a qualified advisor should be consulted.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47972473012566,"sku":"Kontrollbalansräkning-utan-revisor","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/kontrollbalansrakning-utan-revisor-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791141843"},{"product_id":"kontrollbalansrakning-mall-med-revisor","title":"Controlling balance sheet with auditor – Excel template + Swedish\/English guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eControl Balance Sheet for Swedish limited company with an appointed auditor\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete digital template package featuring Swedish and English Excel templates, automatic capital assessment, specific auditor documentation, and detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 4, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eDesigned based on Chapter 25 of the Swedish Companies Act, the Annual Accounts Act, and the Swedish Accounting Standards Board's current guidance on control balance sheets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish Excel template\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eComplete workbook for control balance sheet with auditor workflow.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Excel template\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version for use in accordance with Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed step-by-step guide in Word and PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed English guide in Word and PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDigital delivery\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eAll new files are delivered together in a ZIP package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant: Auditor's report not included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company has an appointed auditor, the control balance sheet must be audited by the \u003cstrong\u003ecompany's auditor\u003c\/strong\u003e. The auditor's report must be prepared following the actual audit and therefore cannot be replaced by a general template. Instead, the package contains a specific worksheet for gathering audit documentation, dates, attachments, and the status of the auditor's report.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen must a control balance sheet be prepared?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe board of directors must \u003cstrong\u003eimmediately\u003c\/strong\u003e prepare a control balance sheet when there is \u003cstrong\u003ereason to assume\u003c\/strong\u003e that the company's equity, calculated according to control balance sheet regulations, is less than half of the registered share capital.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe obligation also applies if an attachment attempt shows that the company lacks assets to fully pay the attachment claim. If the company has an auditor, the control balance sheet must subsequently be audited by them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the Excel template helps you with\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate columns for book values, control balance sheet adjustments, and control balance sheet values,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eautomatic balance control,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecapital test against half the registered share capital for the first assessment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecapital test against the full registered share capital before the second general meeting,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate specification of control balance sheet adjustments and associated valuation documentation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebreakdown of untaxed reserves into equity and deferred tax,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eboard signature page,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea specific \u003cstrong\u003eAUDITOR sheet\u003c\/strong\u003e with a checklist of documents that may need to be provided to the auditor,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003echeckpoints to ensure the auditor's report is available before the general meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe auditor workflow is built into the workbook\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOn the specific auditor sheet, the company can document who the auditor is, when the control balance sheet was submitted for audit, the date of the auditor's report, and whether the report is attached. It also includes a checklist for items such as the general ledger, balance reconciliations, valuation documentation, specifications of control balance sheet adjustments, and board minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe sheet is solely a work and documentation aid. The auditor decides for themselves which audit measures are required and how the separate report is to be formulated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eControl balance sheet adjustments and valuation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe control balance sheet is based on the company's ordinary accounts, but Section 25(14) of the Companies Act allows for specific adjustments. Assets may, under certain conditions, be recorded at a higher value, provisions and liabilities at a lower value, assets can be reported at net realizable value, and untaxed reserves must be divided between equity and deferred tax liability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEvery adjustment must be justified and documented. In this version, this is particularly important since the documentation must be available for review by the company's auditor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFirst general meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the audited control balance sheet shows that equity is less than half of the registered share capital, the board must call a first general meeting as soon as possible. \u003cstrong\u003eBoth the control balance sheet and the auditor's report must be presented at the meeting.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecond general meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the capital is not fully restored and the first general meeting does not decide on liquidation, a second general meeting must normally be held within eight months. Before that meeting, the board must prepare a new control balance sheet and have the company's auditor examine it. For the control balance sheet process to be concluded without liquidation, the control balance sheet must show that equity amounts to at least the registered share capital.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English Excel template and user guide are language versions of documents designed for \u003cstrong\u003eSwedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. They are not intended for use as British, American, or other foreign corporate law documents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho is this package for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSwedish limited companies with an appointed auditor,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eboards of directors needing to investigate suspected capital deficiency,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecompanies wanting to gather control balance sheet and auditor documentation in a structured way,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eaccounting consultants preparing documentation for an auditor's review.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e XLSX, DOCX, and PDF.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/blogs\/kontrollbalansrakning-information-och-vagledning\/kontrollbalansrakning-vardering-av-poster\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRead more about the valuation of items in a control balance sheet →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a finished auditor's report included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The auditor's report must be prepared by the company's auditor after the actual audit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eShould the auditor sign the control balance sheet itself?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe control balance sheet must be signed by the board of directors. The auditor provides their report separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens if the control balance sheet is changed after the auditor's review?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA significantly changed version should be submitted to the auditor again for assessment of whether a new or supplementary audit is needed before the document is used in the control balance sheet process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for the second general meeting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The control step can be selected in the workbook, and the capital test is then adjusted to the requirement for full registered share capital.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a practical documentation and calculation aid and does not replace individual legal, accounting, or audit advice. The board is responsible for the control balance sheet, and the auditor is responsible for their independent audit and report.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":47973303189846,"sku":"07350139912402","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/kontrollbalansrakning-med-revisor-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791143632"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-varning-till-anstalld-mall","title":"Written warning \/ formal reprimand for employee – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten warning \/ reprimand to employee\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete employment law template package for Swedish employers, including Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and a detailed user guide. The template is designed to help the employer document a specific deficiency, clarify what needs to change, and create a structured follow-up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 4, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), relevant work environment and rehabilitation regulations, Labour Court practice, and applicable collective agreements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish template – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for written warning\/reprimand.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish template – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version of the same document.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish template – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance for the employer.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance for international HR environments in Sweden.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA warning is not the same as a disciplinary measure or termination\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA standard written LAS warning\/reprimand is primarily used to document misconduct or deficiencies, clarify the employer's requirements, and give the employee the opportunity to rectify the situation. The document is \u003cstrong\u003enot a notice of termination in itself\u003c\/strong\u003e and should not be described as a disciplinary measure unless permitted by a collective agreement or other specific regulation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the new template helps you document\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eemployer, employee, position, and applicable collective agreement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe type of work-related deficiency in question,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edate, location, and exactly what occurred,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhich obligation, instruction, or policy is affected,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprevious discussions, reprimands, and support measures,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employee's own explanation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employer's objective assessment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econcrete requirements for rectification and follow-up dates,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esupport, training, workplace adaptation, rehabilitation, or reassignment issues,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ehandover, signature, and attachments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eClear warning regarding continued misconduct\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLabour Court practice shows that in many cases, it is important that the employee clearly understands that the employer views the deficiency seriously and, when the situation could escalate toward termination, that the employment may be in jeopardy. The template therefore contains a specific legal clarification that avoids claiming that a future termination is already decided or automatically valid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete facts instead of general criticism\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is built to describe \u003cstrong\u003econcrete events and verifiable deficiencies\u003c\/strong\u003e – not vague formulations such as \"bad attitude\" or \"lack of professionalism\" without connection to the tasks. The employer can state the date, context, instruction\/policy, supporting documentation, and what is actually expected moving forward.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDocumenting the employee's version\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA separate section is intended for the employee's explanation. This creates better documentation and reduces the risk of an employment law assessment being based on a one-sided or incomplete account of events.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSupport, rehabilitation, and workplace adaptation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the deficiency may be related to illness, reduced work capacity, or disability, the employer needs to assess obligations regarding rehabilitation and workplace adaptation. The template therefore includes a specific checklist for support measures and clearly notes that a warning must not replace such investigation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf termination becomes relevant later\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA written warning does not replace the formal rules that apply before termination or dismissal. The employer then needs to assess, among other things, objective grounds, reassignment, time limits, notification to the employee, and – where applicable – notice to the employee's trade union.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSignature without admission\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe document contains a specific receipt clause: the employee's signature only confirms that the document has been received. It does not imply that the employee agrees with the employer's description or assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is particularly useful in Swedish companies with international managers, HR functions, or English-speaking employees. It is not intended as a British, American, or other foreign employment law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains when the template is appropriate, when the employer should wait, how to fill in each section, how a clear LAS warning should be formulated, the significance of less intrusive measures, rehabilitation and workplace adaptation, the reassignment issue, time limits, signature, and practical documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho is the package for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eemployers and HR functions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003emanagers with personnel responsibility,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esmall and medium-sized enterprises that need structured personnel documentation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSwedish businesses with both Swedish and English as working languages.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of documents:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 files.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust a warning always be in writing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, but written documentation makes it significantly easier to demonstrate what has been communicated, when it occurred, and what requirements the employer has set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many warnings must an employee receive before termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general rule regarding a specific number of warnings. The assessment depends on how serious the misconduct is, what the employee has understood, what measures the employer has taken, and other circumstances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the employee obligated to sign?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. If the employee refuses to sign, the employer can document that the document was handed over nonetheless. The template has a dedicated space for this.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used as a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A termination or dismissal procedure is covered by specific legal requirements and separate documents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. In the event of risk of termination, dismissal, discrimination, rehabilitation disputes, or other more extensive disputes, a qualified advisor should be consulted.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48048377135446,"sku":"07350139912419","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-varning-erinran-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791144621"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-mall-generell","title":"Written warning – general template Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – general template for employers\u003c\/strong\u003e with Swedish and English Word\/PDF versions, including a detailed user guide. The package is designed for situations where the employer needs to document a specific work-related deficiency, clarify what must be corrected, and follow up on the situation in an objective and structured manner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 4, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), relevant case law from the Labour Court, rules on workplace accommodation, and applicable parts of collective agreements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – Swedish\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable Word template + print-friendly PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA notice is not automatically a disciplinary measure\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA standard employment law notice is primarily used to document a deficiency, clarify the employer's requirements, and give the employee an opportunity to rectify the situation. The document is \u003cstrong\u003enot in itself a notice of termination\u003c\/strong\u003e and should not be described as a disciplinary measure unless permitted by a collective agreement or other specific regulations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eA general template for many types of personnel matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is intended for situations where a more specialized notice is not required. It can, for example, be adapted for deficiencies in work performance, repeated failure to follow instructions, conduct issues, collaboration problems, or other work-related obligations – provided that the employer describes \u003cstrong\u003econcrete events\u003c\/strong\u003e and makes an individual assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template helps you document\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eemployer, employee, position, and any collective agreement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebackground and purpose of the notice,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edate, time, location, and specific event or deficiency,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhich work task, instruction, policy, or obligation is involved,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esupporting evidence and previous dialogue,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employee's own explanation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employer's objective assessment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econcrete requirements for correction, timeframe, and follow-up,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esupport, workplace accommodation, rehabilitation, and any potential redeployment issues,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edelivery, receipt, and documentation if the employee refuses to sign.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete facts instead of vague judgments\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template is designed to describe what actually happened. Phrases such as \"bad attitude\" or \"lack of professionalism\" should not stand alone, but should be linked to specific actions, work tasks, or instructions. This creates clearer communication and better documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe employee's version has its own section\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee should be given the opportunity to respond to the employer's statements. Therefore, there is a specific section for explanations, objections, and relevant circumstances. If new information comes to light, the employer may need to investigate the matter further before a final assessment is made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRequirements for correction and follow-up\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA notice should not only describe what went wrong. It should also clarify \u003cstrong\u003ewhat needs to change, when it must be corrected, and how it will be followed up\u003c\/strong\u003e. The template therefore includes a separate section for correction and follow-up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen employment may be at risk\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn many cases of misconduct, the Labour Court has emphasized the importance of the employer clearly stating that continued misconduct may affect the employment and giving the employee a genuine opportunity to correct the deficiencies. How clear such a statement needs to be depends on the situation and the seriousness of the misconduct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWorkplace accommodation and rehabilitation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the problem may be related to illness or reduced work capacity, the employer must assess the need for workplace accommodation and rehabilitation. A notice must not be used as a substitute for such measures. The template therefore contains specific checklist questions regarding support, accommodation, and other less intrusive measures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf termination is considered later\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA notice does not replace the formal rules that apply in the event of any future termination or dismissal. The employer will then need to make a separate assessment regarding objective grounds, redeployment, time limits, and notifications\/warnings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReceipt without admission\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe signature in the template only confirms that the employee has received the document. It does not mean that the employee approves of the employer's description or assessment. If the employee chooses not to sign, there is a special field to document how and when the document was delivered anyway.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for Swedish organizations with international managers, HR functions, or English-speaking employees. It is not intended as a British, American, or other foreign labor law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide describes when a general notice is appropriate, when the employer should be cautious, how to document specific events, how to formulate requirements for correction, the significance of the employee's version, workplace accommodation and rehabilitation, what applies if the employment may later be at risk, as well as practical handling of receipts and archiving.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a notice the same thing as a warning?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe terms are sometimes used interchangeably in working life. What matters is what the document actually communicates and how it is used. This product is designed as a general notice\/clarification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the employee have to sign?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. If the employee refuses, the employer can document how and when the document was delivered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used as a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination and dismissal are covered by separate formal and time-related rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many notices are required before termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general rule regarding a specific number. The assessment depends on the circumstances, the seriousness of the deficiency, what measures the employer has taken, and what the employee has understood.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. For more intrusive employment law measures or complicated personnel matters, qualified advisors should be consulted.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48055264280918,"sku":"7350139912426","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-generell-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791148424"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-sakerhetsovertradelser","title":"Written warning – security violations Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice for safety violations\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete template package for Swedish employers who need to document a specific deviation from safety regulations, protective instructions, or safe work methods. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 4, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Work Environment Act, AFS 2023:1 on systematic work environment management, relevant rules on work equipment and personal protective equipment, as well as the Employment Protection Act (LAS) and Labor Court practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template specifically adapted for safety violations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA notice does not replace the work environment investigation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn the event of accidents, ill health, or serious near-misses, the employer must investigate the underlying causes and take measures to prevent the event from recurring. A safety violation must therefore not be handled solely as a personnel matter. The template contains specific checkpoints to distinguish \u003cstrong\u003eindividual behavior\u003c\/strong\u003e from deficiencies in instructions, training, equipment, staffing, or work organization.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when an employee has deviated from a known and legitimate safety rule or work instruction and the employer needs to document the incident and clarify requirements for correction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efailure to use prescribed personal protective equipment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebypassing guards, interlocks, or safety functions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003euse of machinery, tools, or work equipment in violation of instructions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eintentional deviation from an established safe work method,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother documented violations that create a risk of ill health or accidents.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe employee's obligations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Work Environment Act stipulates that employees must participate in work environment management, follow provided regulations, use protective devices, and exercise the caution necessary to prevent ill health and accidents. At the same time, the employer must be able to demonstrate that relevant safety rules were clear, accessible, and possible to follow.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEmployer responsibility is checked separately\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employer must ensure that employees have sufficient knowledge of the work and its risks. For serious risks, there must be written instructions for safe work. The template therefore has specific fields to document:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhich safety rule or instruction is affected,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhen and how it was communicated,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eif the employee received an introduction or training,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eif understanding has been verified,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eif the right protective equipment and safe tools were available.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDirect safety assessment after the incident\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains a checklist for whether the work needed to be stopped or secured, if equipment needed to be locked out, if safety representatives or other work environment functions were informed, if reporting to authorities needs to be evaluated, and if a separate incident investigation and risk assessment have been initiated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eUnderlying causes – not just the question of blame\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Work Environment Authority's rules on systematic work environment management require that the employer investigates the causes of work-related accidents and serious near-misses. The investigation must be used to prevent new incidents. Therefore, the template contains control questions regarding, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eunclear or outdated instructions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003elack of training or introduction,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etechnical faults or insufficient safeguards,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etime pressure, staffing, or organizational causes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eneed for changed risk assessment or work method.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePersonal protective equipment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the incident concerns personal protective equipment, the employer also needs to check that the correct equipment has been selected, provided, and maintained, and that the employee has received instruction on its use. Protective equipment must not be used as a substitute for measures that can eliminate or reduce the risk at the source.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe employee's version is documented\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee gets a separate section for their explanation. This can, for example, reveal if instructions were unclear, if equipment was not functioning, or if time pressure, staffing, or other work environment factors affected the situation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRequirement for correction and safety measures\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template distinguishes between \u003cstrong\u003ewhat the employee must do\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003ewhat the employer needs to address\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is possible to document mandatory use of protective equipment, safe work methods, refresher training, supervision, as well as technical or organizational improvements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf the violation is repeated\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eRepeated or serious breaches of legitimate safety rules can in some cases have employment law consequences. In cases of misconduct, the Labor Court has attached importance to whether the employee clearly understood what was required and, when the situation has not been so serious that it was unnecessary, had the opportunity to correct themselves. A potential subsequent dismissal or termination must always be assessed separately according to the Employment Protection Act (LAS), collective agreements, and the circumstances in the individual case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReceipt without acknowledgment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee's signature on the document only confirms receipt. It does not mean that the employee approves the employer's description or assessment. If a signature is declined, there is specific space to document how and when the document was handed over.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e and is intended for Swedish workplaces with international managers, HR functions, or English-speaking employees. It is not designed for British, American, or other foreign labor law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains the obligations of the employee and employer, how the incident should be documented, what should be handled in a separate work environment investigation, reporting to authorities in case of serious incidents, personal protective equipment, requirements for correction, follow-up, and how potential future employment law actions should be distinguished from the notice itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it enough to give a notice after a serious near-miss?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The employer must also investigate the causes, assess the risks, and implement the work environment measures that are necessary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used if an employee does not use protective equipment?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if the employer simultaneously checks that the right equipment was available, that the requirement was clear, and that the employee received the necessary information and instruction.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the employee have to sign?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The employer can document the handover even if the employee declines a signature.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the document a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A potential termination or dismissal is covered by separate legal requirements and must be tried independently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation support and does not replace the employer's systematic work environment management, a mandatory report to authorities, or individual legal advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48055315661142,"sku":"7350139912433","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-sakerhetsovertradelser-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791149242"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-mall-dalig-attityd-eller-negativt-beteende","title":"Written warning – conduct \u0026 cooperation Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – behavior and cooperation\u003c\/strong\u003e is a complete template package for Swedish employers who need to document specific behaviors, cooperation issues, or recurring conflicts that affect work. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 4, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), the Discrimination Act, the Swedish Work Environment Authority's regulations on organizational and social work environment, and the whistleblower protection act’s prohibition against retaliation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for concrete behavioral and cooperation problems.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version of the same document.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eAvoid the phrase “bad attitude” as the sole basis\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA general label such as \u003cstrong\u003e“bad attitude”\u003c\/strong\u003e is too subjective. The new template is therefore built to document \u003cstrong\u003eobservable actions\u003c\/strong\u003e: what was actually said or done, which work-related obligation is affected, how the work was impacted, and what concrete change is expected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template appropriate?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when concrete behaviors affect workflow, cooperation, customer relations, quality, or the work environment, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring disrespectful or inappropriate conduct,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring disruptive conflicts with colleagues or management,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erefusal to follow legitimate and clear work instructions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eaggressive or confrontational behavior that impacts work,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esystematic unwillingness to fulfill specific collaborative tasks included in the role.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe template separates behavior from personality\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employer should not judge a person's character or general personality. The document therefore contains specific fields for dates, context, words or actions, actual impact, and relevant documentation. This reduces the risk of vague or arbitrary phrasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe employee's version must be documented\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee is provided with their own section for their explanation. If new information emerges – for example regarding unclear requirements, high workload, conflict, lack of management, or other work environment factors – the employer may need to investigate further before a final assessment is made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWork environment and victimization\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAFS 2023:2 requires the employer to prevent victimization and manage organizational and social work environment risks. If the behavior is linked to conflict, unhealthy workload, unclear roles, or other work environment conditions, the employer must also address that part. A written notice does not replace the responsibility for the work environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHarassment and discrimination require separate investigation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf an employee reports harassment or sexual harassment, the employer has a specific duty to investigate the circumstances and take reasonable measures to prevent further harassment. This written notice does not replace such an investigation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProtected criticism and whistleblowing\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a specific checkpoint to avoid retaliation. It may not be used to punish an employee for protected whistleblowing, legitimate reporting of misconduct, or other protected rights. The employer should also check collective agreements and union rights before taking action.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eClear requirements for change\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstead of writing that the employee must “improve their attitude,” the template helps the employer specify:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhich concrete behavior must cease,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat should be done instead,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat support the employer offers,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhen the improvement is to be followed up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIllness, disability, and work adaptation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the behavior may be related to illness, disability, or reduced work capacity, the employer needs to assess obligations regarding work adaptation and rehabilitation. A written notice must not be used as a substitute for such measures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf employment may later be in jeopardy\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf continued misconduct could eventually affect employment, the employer must make a separate labor law assessment in accordance with the Employment Protection Act (LAS) and any applicable collective agreement. The template contains a carefully phrased clarification that can be used when it is truly relevant, without implying that a future termination has already been decided.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAcknowledgment without admission\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee's signature only confirms receipt. It does not imply that the employee accepts the employer's description or assessment. If a signature is refused, there is a separate field for how and when the document was delivered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for Swedish companies with international managers, HR departments, or English-speaking employees. It is not intended as a British, American, or other foreign labor law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide covers fact-checking, concrete phrasing, work environment, harassment, discrimination, whistleblowing, work adaptation, corrective requirements, follow-up, and how any later termination should be kept legally separate from the written notice itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I write “bad attitude” in the notice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is better to describe concrete behaviors and how they affect the work. Vague personal judgments are harder to follow up and can create unnecessary legal risk.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for conflicts between colleagues?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if there are concrete work-related behaviors to document. At the same time, the employer needs to assess whether the conflict points to work environment problems that also need to be managed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens if the employee reports harassment?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn that case, the employer may have a separate duty to investigate according to the Discrimination Act and\/or work environment regulations. The notice does not replace that process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the document a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination or dismissal is subject to specific requirements and must be assessed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice in a specific labor law matter.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48055370514774,"sku":"7350139912440","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-beteende-samarbete-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791151768"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-mall-brist-pa-professionalism","title":"Written reprimand – professionalism \u0026 professional conduct Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten warning – professionalism and professional conduct\u003c\/strong\u003e is a complete template package for Swedish employers who need to document concrete deficiencies in professional conduct, customer service, communication, quality, documentation, or compliance with legitimate work routines. The package contains Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), the Discrimination Act, the Swedish Work Environment Authority's regulations on organizational and social work environment, the Whistleblowing Act, and relevant case law from the Labour Court.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish warning – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for concrete deficiencies in professional conduct.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish warning – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version of the same document.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003e\"Lack of professionalism\" must be specified\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eProfessionalism is not an independent legal category. The new template therefore helps the employer to describe \u003cstrong\u003ewhat actually happened\u003c\/strong\u003e, which legitimate role requirement or work instruction is involved, how the work was affected, and what concrete change is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when concrete actions conflict with clear work-related expectations, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring inappropriate treatment of customers or suppliers,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003elack of documentation despite clear requirements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring unprofessional or inappropriate communication in the professional role,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efailure to follow clear quality, confidentiality, or work routines,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother concrete deviations from legitimate requirements that are part of the work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template helps you document\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edate, time, location, and concrete incident,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhich policy, instruction, role standard, or task is involved,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eactual impact on customer, quality, workflow, safety, or team,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprevious feedback, training, and guidance,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employee's own explanation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employer's objective assessment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econcrete requirements for correction and what is expected instead,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employer's support and follow-up date.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eClear requirements instead of subjective judgments\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePhrasings such as \"be more professional,\" \"bad attitude,\" or \"disloyal\" are too vague if they stand alone. The template is therefore designed to link the criticism to observable behaviors, clear role requirements, and actual impact on the business.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompetence, introduction, and support\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBefore a warning is used, the employer should verify that the requirements have been clear, legitimate, and possible to follow. If the problem is due to a lack of introduction, training, unclear roles, or insufficient resources, the employer may need to take support or competence measures instead of, or in parallel with, a warning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWork environment and victimization\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Work Environment Authority's regulations require the employer to prevent victimization and manage organizational and social work environment risks. Conflicts, workload, unclear roles, or lack of management may therefore need to be investigated separately. A warning does not replace the responsibility for the work environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHarassment and discrimination\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the employee reports harassment or sexual harassment, the employer may have a special obligation to investigate what happened, take measures, and follow up. The template therefore contains a specific checkpoint to avoid confusing a personnel matter with a discrimination investigation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhistleblowing and protected rights\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA warning may not be used as retaliation against anyone covered by the Whistleblowing Act's protection or who is otherwise exercising a protected right. The employer should therefore check the background of the alleged deficiency before the action is documented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf continued misconduct could affect employment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn cases of misconduct, the Labour Court has emphasized the importance of the employee normally understanding that the employer views the deficiency seriously and is given a real opportunity to correct themselves. If a future termination is later considered, it must be assessed separately according to the Employment Protection Act (LAS), including the rules on objective grounds and reassignment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReceipt without acknowledgment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee's signature only confirms that the document has been received. It does not imply that the employee accepts the employer's description or legal assessment. If a signature is declined, there is a special field to document how the document was delivered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish businesses with international managers, HR functions, or English-speaking employees, and is not intended as a foreign employment law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide goes through step-by-step when the template is suitable, how facts should be documented, how clear requirements are formulated, what importance training and support can have, and how work environment, discrimination, whistleblowing, and any subsequent termination should be kept legally separate from the warning itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I write \"lack of professionalism\" as the only justification?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is better to describe concrete actions, which work-related standard applied, and what actual impact occurred.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for customer service?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if the employer can describe concrete events and clear legitimate requirements for how the role should be performed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens if the problem is actually a lack of competence?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThen the employer should assess the need for training, guidance, clearer instructions, or other support measures before the situation is treated solely as misconduct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the document a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination and dismissal are covered by separate formal and assessment rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice in a concrete labor law case.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48059529134422,"sku":"7350139912464","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-professionalism-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791152918"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-mall-fronvaro-forseningar","title":"Written warning – absence \u0026 lateness Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – absence and lateness\u003c\/strong\u003e is a comprehensive template package for Swedish employers who need to document recurring late arrivals, unauthorized absence, or failures in absence routines in an objective and structured manner. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), the Sick Pay Act, the Parental Leave Act, and relevant case law from the Labour Court regarding unauthorized absence and misconduct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for absence and lateness.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eNot all absence is misconduct\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template is designed to distinguish \u003cstrong\u003eunauthorized absence and failures in absence routines\u003c\/strong\u003e from absence that may be protected or require different handling, such as illness, VAB (temporary parental benefit)\/parental leave, granted vacation, or rehabilitation needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template appropriate?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when there are concrete, documented deficiencies, such as:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring late arrival despite clear working hours,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eabsence without contact according to a clear absence routine,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eabsence after a leave request has been explicitly denied,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erepeated failures in reporting sickness where the problem is the routine – not the illness itself,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother concrete deviations from clear and legitimate attendance or reporting requirements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete incidents and actual working time\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a specific table where the employer can document dates, planned work shifts, actual attendance or absence, and how the notification was made. This provides significantly better documentation than general statements that someone is “unreliable” or “often late.”\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChecks before employment law assessment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBefore a written notice is issued, the employer should verify whether the absence is related to:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eillness or reduced work capacity,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVAB, parental leave, or other statutory leave,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003egranted vacation or other agreed leave,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erehabilitation or the need for workplace adaptation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecollective agreement rules regarding working hours, absence, or disciplinary measures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIllness and medical certificates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSpecial rules apply to sickness absence. For sick pay, the employee must normally substantiate continued reduced work capacity with a medical certificate from the eighth calendar day of the sickness period. Under special circumstances, earlier certificates may be requested. Recurring sickness absence may also necessitate rehabilitation and workplace adaptation and should therefore not automatically be treated as misconduct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVAB and parental leave\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Parental Leave Act contains an explicit prohibition against detriment related to protected parental leave. The template therefore includes a specific checklist to avoid, for example, VAB or other statutory parental leave being incorrectly classified as unauthorized absence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDocumenting the employee's explanation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee is given a separate section for their version of events. It may emerge, for example, that a schedule was unclear, that sickness notification was made in a way other than the employer initially thought, or that there are medical or family-related circumstances that must be assessed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eClear requirements for rectification and follow-up\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstead of a vague request to “improve attendance,” the template helps the employer specify exactly what is required moving forward, such as:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003earriving on time for scheduled work shifts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereporting sickness before a specified time,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtacting the correct manager or function,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esubmitting requested documentation according to applicable rules,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea specific date for follow-up.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf problems persist\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTermination by the employer must, according to the Employment Protection Act (LAS), be based on objective grounds. Unauthorized absence can be serious, and the Labour Court has in some cases accepted very severe measures in instances of serious unauthorized absence. However, the assessment is always individual and is influenced by factors such as the extent of the absence, the employee’s explanation, prior clear warnings, the issue of redeployment, and the employer’s own obligations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAcknowledgement of receipt without admission\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee’s signature only confirms receipt. It does not mean that the employee accepts the employer’s description or assessment. If the employee refuses to sign, there is specific space to document how and when the document was delivered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish businesses with international managers, HR functions, or English-speaking employees, and is not intended as a foreign labour law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide goes through, step by step, how absence should be classified, illness and medical certificates, VAB and parental leave, documentation, requirements for rectification, follow-up, and how a potential subsequent termination or dismissal should be kept legally separate from the notice itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product will be sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan an employer issue a written notice for late arrival?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if there are clear working hours and the concrete lateness can be documented. Recurring lateness should be assessed based on its extent, previous communication, and other circumstances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan sickness absence be treated as unauthorized absence?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot solely because the employee is sick. However, failures in a clear sickness notification routine may need to be handled separately, and sickness absence is covered by special rules regarding sick pay, certificates, and rehabilitation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for VAB?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template should not be used to punish legally protected VAB\/parental leave. Always verify the right to leave and the notification rules first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the document a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination and dismissal are covered by separate legal requirements and must be assessed independently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice in a specific employment law matter.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48059535556950,"sku":"7350139912471","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-franvaro-forseningar-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791154574"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-brott-mot-foretagets-policy","title":"Written warning – policy violation Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – policy violation\u003c\/strong\u003e is a complete template package for Swedish employers who need to document a specific breach of an internal policy, guideline, or workplace rule. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), the Co-determination Act (MBL), the Discrimination Act, the Whistleblowing Act, as well as relevant work environment regulations and collective agreements where applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for documenting policy violations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish notice – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eAn internal policy is not automatically sufficient grounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template is designed to verify \u003cstrong\u003eexactly which rule applied, which version of the policy was current, how the rule was communicated, and whether it is legitimate and work-related\u003c\/strong\u003e. An internal policy cannot override law, employment contracts, or collective agreements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template appropriate?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used for concrete deviations from clear workplace rules, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebreach of IT, information security, or access routines,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eviolation of confidentiality or information handling policies,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edeviation from a code of conduct or other clear work-related guidelines,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efailure to comply with quality or documentation routines,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother concrete violations of legitimate and clearly communicated rules.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExact policy rule and current version\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe product contains specific fields for policy title, version date, and the exact rule or section. This reduces the risk of the employer referring to a general policy without being able to demonstrate which specific obligation the employee is alleged to have breached.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow did the employee become aware of the policy?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template helps the employer document whether the rule was communicated via onboarding, training, intranet, employee handbook, meeting, receipt, or previous reminder. The employee's actual opportunity to follow the policy should also be verified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMBL and the introduction of policies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the employer is bound by a collective agreement, a significant change in operations or working and employment conditions may trigger a primary duty to negotiate under the Co-determination Act (MBL). Therefore, the template contains a specific checkpoint for how the policy in question was introduced or amended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProtected rights – special check\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn internal policy may not be used as grounds for retaliation or other prohibited treatment. The template therefore includes checkpoints for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprotected whistleblowing and reporting of malpractice,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereported discrimination or participation in a discrimination investigation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eunion activity and collective bargaining rights,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother statutory rights that cannot be set aside by internal policy.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWork environment and safety must be handled separately\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the policy violation concerns safety, work environment, or incidents, the employer must also conduct the investigations and risk measures required by work environment regulations. A written notice does not replace that responsibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/skriftlig-erinran-sakerhetsovertradelser\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFor purely safety-related violations, our special safety template is also available →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDocumenting the employee's version\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee is provided with their own section for their explanation. It may turn out, for example, that the policy was unclear, an older version was used, training was missing, or there were practical obstacles to following the rule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete requirements for correction and follow-up\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInstead of just writing that the employee must “follow company policy,” the template helps the employer formulate exactly what must stop, what must be done instead, what support or training will be provided, and when the situation is to be followed up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf the violation is repeated\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA policy violation may in some cases have employment law consequences, but the assessment depends on factors such as the clarity of the rule, how it was communicated, the seriousness of the violation, the employee's explanation, and previous actions. If termination is later considered, it must be assessed separately in accordance with the Employment Protection Act (LAS) and any applicable collective agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAcknowledgment without admission\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee's signature only confirms that the document has been received. It does not mean that the employee accepts the employer's description or legal assessment. If the signature is declined, there is specific space to document the delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version based on Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish organizations with international managers, HR departments, or English-speaking employees and is not intended as a foreign employment law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide walks you through the policy check, the MBL question, communication of rules, documentation of facts, protected rights, work environment, the employee's version, correction requirements, follow-up, and how any subsequent termination should be kept legally separate from the notice itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it enough for a policy to be on the intranet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot always. It is relevant whether the rule was clear, current, legitimate, and reasonably known to the employee. How the policy was communicated should therefore be documented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a policy conflict with a collective agreement?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn internal policy cannot be used to override a collective agreement or mandatory legal provisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for whistleblowing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt must not be used as retaliation for protected reporting. Always check whether the alleged policy violation is related to whistleblowing or other protected activity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the document a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination and dismissal are covered by separate rules and must be assessed independently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice in a specific labor law matter.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48059557839190,"sku":"7350139912488","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-policyovertradelse-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791155156"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-mall-bristande-arbetsprestation","title":"Written warning – poor work performance Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten Warning – Poor Performance\u003c\/strong\u003e is a comprehensive employment law template package for Swedish employers who need to document concrete performance deficiencies, clarify reasonable requirements, and create a structured improvement and follow-up plan. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Employment Protection Act (LAS), the Discrimination Act, the Swedish Work Environment Authority’s regulations on workplace adaptation, and relevant case law from the Labor Court.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish warning – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for concrete performance deficiencies and improvement plans.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish warning – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrintable version of the same document.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten notice – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003ePoor performance must be substantiated\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePhrases such as \u003cstrong\u003e\"low performance,\"\u003c\/strong\u003e \u003cstrong\u003e\"inefficient,\"\u003c\/strong\u003e or \u003cstrong\u003e\"inadequate\"\u003c\/strong\u003e are too vague on their own. The new template helps the employer document which work tasks or goals are affected, what standard actually applies, what results have been achieved, and what concrete deviation needs to be corrected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is this template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when there are verifiable deficiencies in work performance, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring quality errors or incorrect deliveries despite clear requirements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereasonable and communicated goals that are not reached over a relevant period,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erecurring delays in work tasks despite clear priorities,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edeficiencies in quality or productivity despite training, instruction, and support,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother concrete deviations from legitimate requirements included in the role.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eClear and reasonable requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains specific fields for the work task, expected standard, how the requirement has been communicated, and why the requirement is reasonable for the role in question. This reduces the risk of retroactive criticism or expectations that the employee was never made aware of.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete events and results\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA separate table makes it possible to document dates, work tasks or goals, expected outcomes, actual outcomes, impact, and relevant supporting data. This provides a more objective basis than general judgments about the employee's personality or attitude.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSupport and professional development documentation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employer should check whether the employee has received sufficient onboarding, instruction, training, supervision, resources, and reasonable priorities. The template therefore includes a specific section for previous feedback and support measures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eA separate section for the employee's version\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee is given the opportunity to describe circumstances that may have affected their performance, such as unclear instructions, high workload, technical obstacles, competence gaps, or health issues. The employer then documents their assessment following the dialogue.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWorkplace adaptation and disability\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf performance may be linked to illness, disability, or reduced work capacity, the employer needs to assess the need for workplace adaptation, rehabilitation, and—where relevant—reasonable accessibility measures. A warning must not replace such obligations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIndividual improvement and development plan\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a structured plan for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat improvement is required,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ehow the result will be measured,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhat support the employer is providing,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edeadlines or timeframes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efollow-up dates and the responsible manager.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf no improvement occurs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the Employment Protection Act (LAS), termination by the employer must be based on objective grounds. If performance continues to be deficient, the employer must conduct a new, comprehensive assessment and, among other things, verify the clarity and reasonableness of the requirements, support measures, whether the deficiencies are lasting, whether workplace adaptation or discrimination issues are relevant, and whether reassignment needs to be explored.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNot the same as termination\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe document is \u003cstrong\u003enot a notice of termination\u003c\/strong\u003e and is not in itself an automatic disciplinary measure. Any subsequent termination, dismissal, or other intervention must be assessed separately according to LAS, any applicable collective agreements or principal agreements, and the circumstances of the individual case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAcknowledgment of receipt without admission\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employee’s signature only confirms that the document has been received. It does not imply that the employee accepts the employer’s description or assessment. If a signature is refused, a special field is provided to document the handover.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is particularly useful in Swedish organizations with international managers, HR functions, or English-speaking employees and is not intended as a British, American, or other foreign labor law document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains when the template is appropriate, how to formulate reasonable performance requirements, what facts should be collected, how to document support and competence development, workplace adaptation and discrimination issues, the improvement plan, follow-up, and what needs to be verified if a more serious labor law measure is considered later.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/skriftlig-erinran-mall-generell\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you need a broader warning? See also our general template →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow clear must performance requirements be?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employer should be able to describe what is expected in an understandable and reasonable manner and demonstrate how the requirements have been communicated. The template is therefore built for both qualitative and quantitative requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the employer provide training or support?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the situation. If the deficiency may be due to insufficient onboarding, competence, unclear instructions, or a lack of prerequisites, the employer should assess what reasonable support measures are needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens if performance is affected by illness or disability?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn that case, the employer needs to assess, among other things, workplace adaptation, rehabilitation, and any reasonable accessibility measures before the situation is treated solely as misconduct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used as a notice of termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination and dismissal are covered by separate legal requirements and must be assessed independently.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice in a specific employment law matter.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48059570323798,"sku":"7350139912495","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skriftlig-erinran-bristande-arbetsprestation-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791156206"},{"product_id":"formellt-bestridande-av-faktura-foretag","title":"Disputing an invoice – Company Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice dispute – B2B\u003c\/strong\u003e is a comprehensive B2B package for companies that need to object to an invoice or other payment claim that is wholly or partially incorrect. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides based on Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Sale of Goods Act, the Interest Act, the Debt Enforcement and Rehabilitation Act, the Limitations Act, rules on applications for injunctions to pay, and contract and debt law principles for B2B relationships.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish dispute template – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable B2B template for total or partial disputes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish dispute template – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice dispute – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eB2B: start with the agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBetween companies, the agreement, the order, the purchase order, and incorporated general terms are often decisive. Consumer legislation does not normally apply in purely B2B relationships. When purchasing movable property, the Sale of Goods Act may be applicable, but it is dispositive and can be opted out of or modified through agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is this template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used when the company needs to dispute, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ean invoice without a valid order or from an unauthorized purchaser,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprice, quantity, or hours that deviate from the agreement, quote, or purchase order,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003emissing, delayed, or contractually non-compliant delivery,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edefective goods or services that have been complained about,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eduplicate invoices or already paid items,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003emissing credit, discount, return, or agreed adjustment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eincorrect penalty interest, fees, or debt collection costs,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea fully or partially incorrect payment claim.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTotal or partial dispute\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template has separate fields for the invoiced amount, disputed amount, and any undisputed portion. This makes it possible to clearly limit the dispute without creating ambiguity regarding the part of the invoice that is actually correct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAgreement, PO, and delivery documentation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new version is specifically adapted for B2B and helps the company link the objection to framework agreements, purchase orders\/POs, accepted quotes, price lists, delivery notes, timesheets, complaints, quality documentation, and other relevant contractual documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSale of goods and services between companies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor sales of movable property between companies, the Sale of Goods Act may apply when the agreement does not regulate the issue. For services between companies, there is no general law equivalent to the Consumer Services Act. Therefore, the agreement, industry terms, and general contract law principles often carry greater weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePayment terms and penalty interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Interest Act contains specific rules for payment between traders. As a starting point, a 30-day rule applies to the payment of goods and services unless the creditor has explicitly agreed to a longer payment period. If the due date is determined in advance, penalty interest can normally accrue from the due date. When using the Interest Act levels, the interest is the reference rate plus eight percentage points. However, agreed terms must always be checked first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSet-off and counterclaims\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains a specific option to state a counterclaim or set-off objection. Since the conditions for set-off can be complicated, the company should verify that legal requirements are met before leaving an invoice unpaid solely with reference to set-off.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePrescription\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor corporate debts, the general limitation period is normally ten years, but limitation interruptions or special rules may affect the assessment. The template therefore has a separate basis for a limitation objection but notes that the underlying facts must be verified before it is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDebt collection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the disputed claim proceeds to debt collection, the company should also object to the collection claim and attach the previous dispute. A clear and factually based objection should explain why the claim is incorrect and what documentation supports the company's position.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #f0c7b0;border-radius:12px;background:#fff7f2\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eThe Swedish Enforcement Authority (Kronofogden) – extra important for companies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company receives an application for an injunction to pay (betalningsföreläggande), it must respond to the Swedish Enforcement Authority within the stated time and object there. A previous dispute sent to the supplier or debt collection agency does not replace the response to the Swedish Enforcement Authority. Furthermore, companies may receive a payment default notice from credit reporting agencies as soon as an application for an injunction to pay is registered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDispute resolution and arbitration clause\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAlways check if the agreement contains a clause regarding general court or arbitration proceedings. For larger amounts, extensive counterclaims, or arbitration clauses, legal advice should be sought early.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish companies with international suppliers, customers, purchasing functions, or corporate languages in English and is not intended as a template according to British, American, or other foreign law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide covers the contractual chain, disputed and undisputed amounts, the Sale of Goods Act, B2B services, payment terms, penalty interest, set-off, limitation, debt collection, the Swedish Enforcement Authority, dispute resolution, and practical documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Consumer Sales Act apply between two companies?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, normally not. For sales of movable property between companies, the Sale of Goods Act may be relevant instead, but agreed terms often take precedence since the Sale of Goods Act is dispositive.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the company dispute only part of the invoice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The template has separate fields for the disputed and undisputed amounts so that the scope is clear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens if the invoice goes to the Swedish Enforcement Authority?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe company must object to the Swedish Enforcement Authority within the stated time. A previous dispute to the supplier is not sufficient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan an application to the Swedish Enforcement Authority affect the company's credit rating?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Swedish Enforcement Authority states that companies may receive a payment default notice from credit reporting agencies as soon as an application is received.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. For larger or complex B2B disputes, a qualified advisor should be consulted.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48063048417622,"sku":"350139912518","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/bestridande-faktura-foretag-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791157675"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-erinran-mall-engelska","title":"Written Notice – English Word\/PDF + Swedish Reference + Guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWritten Notice \/ Reprimand – English template under Swedish employment law\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis English-first template package is intended for Swedish employers who need to document misconduct, performance concerns or another work-related deficiency in English. It is designed for workplaces where English is used operationally while the employment relationship remains governed by Swedish law. A Swedish reference version and user guides are included for comparison and internal HR use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 5 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe package is structured with reference to the Swedish Employment Protection Act (LAS), discrimination rules, whistleblower protection and relevant work-environment obligations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEnglish Written Notice – Word and PDF,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEnglish user guide – Word and PDF,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwedish reference template – Word and PDF,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSwedish user guide – Word and PDF.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNot automatically a disciplinary sanction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA written notice or reprimand should not automatically be treated as a statutory disciplinary penalty. Its practical purpose is to document what has occurred, clarify the employer's expectations, state what must change and create a reliable record of communication and follow-up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eConcrete facts instead of vague accusations\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template encourages the employer to describe dates, events, instructions, expectations and observed deficiencies as concretely as possible. It also provides space for the employee's response and for documenting follow-up measures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCorrection and follow-up\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe document separates the description of the issue from the required corrective action. The employer can specify what is expected, what support or instructions are provided, when follow-up will take place and who is responsible for the process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eImportant employment-law safeguards\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBefore using a warning as part of a later employment-law process, the employer should consider whether the matter may involve illness, disability, workplace adjustment, discrimination, harassment, whistleblowing, protected leave, trade-union rights or shortcomings in the work environment. A later termination or dismissal is a separate legal process with its own requirements and must not be treated as automatic merely because a written notice has been issued.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eEmployee signature\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used so that a signature confirms receipt rather than agreement with the employer's assessment. If the employee does not sign, the employer can document when and how the notice was delivered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFormat and delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English + Swedish reference version.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download; no physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis template is general documentation support and does not replace individual employment-law advice in complex or high-risk cases.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48063289131350,"sku":"0350139912525","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/written-notice-english-swedish-law-product-image-2027.png?v=1791159737"},{"product_id":"skriftlig-varning-till-anstalld-mall-engelska","title":"Written Warning to Employee – English Word\/PDF + Swedish Reference + Guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWritten Warning to Employee – English-first template under Swedish employment law\u003c\/strong\u003e for Swedish employers who need to issue a clear, structured and professionally documented warning in English. The package also includes a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 5 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against the Swedish Employment Protection Act (LAS), current discrimination rules, whistleblower protection and the Swedish Work Environment Authority's rules on organisational and social work environment and workplace adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Written Warning – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable primary template under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Written Warning – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance for Swedish employers using English at work.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference template – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for internal comparison.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish reference guide corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA warning is not automatically a disciplinary sanction\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn ordinary written warning or LAS warning is primarily a documentation and clarification tool. Its purpose is to describe the deficiency, explain what must change and, where appropriate, make clear that continued misconduct may have employment-law consequences. It is \u003cstrong\u003enot by itself a notice of termination\u003c\/strong\u003e and should not automatically be described as a disciplinary sanction unless a collective agreement or other specific rules allow that.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBuilt for English-speaking workplaces in Sweden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English template is intended for Swedish companies where managers, HR teams or employees use English as a working language. It remains a \u003cstrong\u003eSwedish-law document\u003c\/strong\u003e and is not intended for UK, US or other foreign employment-law systems.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConcrete facts instead of general accusations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes structured sections for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe specific incident, conduct or performance issue,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edates, context and supporting documentation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe duty, policy, instruction or work requirement concerned,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprevious meetings, instructions or support measures,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employee's own explanation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe employer's objective assessment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eClear correction requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe employer can define exactly what must change, by when, what support will be provided and how improvement will be followed up. This is preferable to vague phrases such as “improve your attitude” or “perform better”.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen employment may be at risk\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish Labour Court practice places importance in many misconduct cases on the employee understanding that the employer considers the matter serious and, when relevant, that continued misconduct may affect the employment. The template therefore contains a carefully worded employment-law clarification without suggesting that a future termination has already been decided.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIllness, rehabilitation and workplace adjustment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the issue may be connected to illness, reduced work ability or disability, the employer must assess workplace adjustment, rehabilitation and, where relevant, reasonable accessibility measures. A written warning must not replace those obligations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDiscrimination, harassment and protected activity\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the underlying issue involves alleged discrimination, harassment, conflict or degrading treatment, separate investigation or work-environment duties may apply. The employer should also check that the warning is not connected to protected whistleblowing or another legally protected activity. Swedish whistleblower legislation prohibits retaliation against persons who meet the statutory conditions for protection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf termination is later considered\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA written warning does not replace the separate assessment required before termination or dismissal. Under LAS, termination by the employer must be based on objective reasons, and reassignment may need to be considered. Before termination for personal reasons, the employee must normally be notified in advance under section 30 LAS, and the local union must be notified at the same time if the employee is unionised.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReceipt does not mean agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template makes clear that the employee's signature confirms receipt only. It does not automatically mean that the employee accepts the employer's description or legal assessment. If the employee refuses to sign, delivery can be documented separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is the primary template in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference so that HR, management and advisers can maintain consistent bilingual documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/skriftlig-varning-till-anstalld-mall\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first package? See the Swedish Written Warning product →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many warnings are required before termination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general rule requiring a fixed number of warnings. The assessment depends on the seriousness of the issue, what the employee understood, previous measures and the circumstances as a whole.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the employee have to sign?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A refusal to sign does not prevent the employer from documenting delivery. The template includes wording clarifying that a signature confirms receipt only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the warning be used for performance problems?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the expectations have been reasonable and sufficiently clear and the employer also considers whether training, support, workplace adjustment or other measures are relevant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan this template be used as a termination notice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Termination and dismissal are subject to separate legal requirements and require their own process and documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice in a specific employment-law matter.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48063307284822,"sku":"7350139912532","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/written-warning-employee-english-swedish-law-product-image-2027.png?v=1791160948"},{"product_id":"mall-villkorat-aktieagartillskott-tillskottshandling","title":"Conditional shareholder contribution – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConditional shareholder contribution – complete contribution document for Swedish limited liability companies (aktiebolag)\u003c\/strong\u003e including Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides. The package is designed for situations where an owner wishes to strengthen the company's equity while retaining a conditional possibility for future repayment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Swedish Companies Act's regulations regarding value transfers and profit distributions, current guidance from the Swedish Tax Agency, the Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket), and the Swedish Accounting Standards Board, as well as relevant case law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish contribution document – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template with conditions for future repayment.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish contribution document – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConditional Shareholder Contribution – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF with a practical example.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA conditional contribution is not the same as a loan\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template is explicitly designed so that the contribution strengthens the company's equity. \u003cstrong\u003eThe company does not undertake an unconditional repayment obligation through the contribution document itself.\u003c\/strong\u003e Instead, the repayment condition is directed at the shareholders and is based on their commitment to act and vote for repayment when legally permissible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy this structure is important\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency’s guidance states that the actual agreement is of great importance. If a repayment claim is directed at the company instead of the shareholders, the transfer may instead be characterized as debt. The template is therefore built to clearly distinguish the conditional shareholder contribution from a standard loan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template covers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe company and the contributor,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eContribution amount, payment date, and method of payment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eConditions for future repayment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRequirement for a legal general meeting resolution prior to repayment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePriority between multiple conditional shareholder contributions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAssignment of the repayment right,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCompany confirmation of receipt,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eJoinder of other shareholders,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBoard\/accounting reference,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eGoverning law, dispute resolution, and signatures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRepayment requires more than just company funds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eRepayment of a conditional shareholder contribution is treated under civil law as a profit distribution\/value transfer. This means, among other things, that the company must have distributable funds, that the protection for restricted equity and the prudence rule must be satisfied, and that the general meeting must pass a valid resolution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eConsequently, there is no automatic right to demand repayment on a specific date simply because the contribution was made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePriority between multiple contributions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company already has one or more conditional shareholder contributions, the order of priority needs to be documented. The template includes options for equal priority, subordinated priority, and other expressly agreed-upon arrangements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAssignment of the repayment right\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe right to future repayment may need to be handled separately from the shares themselves, for example during a share sale. The template therefore includes a specific section on assignment and consent, as well as guidance on how changes in ownership should be documented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAccounting and tax\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe regulations of the Swedish Accounting Standards Board state that received shareholder contributions are reported as unrestricted equity. For the contributor, the accounting and tax treatment may differ from an unconditional contribution. The Swedish Tax Agency, among other things, treats the right of repayment separately when calculating capital gains. For larger amounts, group relationships, or changes in ownership, accounting and tax advice should be sought.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInterest – important difference from a loan\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe standard template contains no ongoing interest before a future repayment resolution. The Swedish Tax Agency's guidance indicates that the company does not have a debt-like obligation toward the contributor before the general meeting has decided on repayment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for, for example, Swedish companies with international owners, board members, or English as their corporate language. It is not intended as a template according to British, American, or other foreign corporate law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains the difference between a conditional contribution and a loan, how to fill out the template, why the condition is directed at the shareholders, how future repayment works, priority, interest, accounting, tax, changes in ownership, and common mistakes. A concrete example of partial future repayment is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/mall-ovillkorat-aktieagartillskott-tillskottshandling\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes the contribution not need to be repayable? See also the template for unconditional shareholder contributions →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital download. No physical product will be sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the company promise repayment on a specific date?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis should not be done in a standard document for a conditional shareholder contribution. An unconditional maturity date and direct repayment obligation can change the structure into a loan\/debt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust other shareholders sign?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor the repayment condition to have the intended effect, relevant shareholders should accept the condition. The template therefore includes a specific joinder section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the repayment right be sold separately from the shares?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the Swedish Tax Agency's guidance assumes that the right to repayment can be assigned separately. The assignment and who the rightful holder is should be clearly documented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan repayment be made as soon as the company makes a profit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot automatically. The corporate law requirements for distributable funds, capital protection, prudence, and a valid general meeting resolution must first be met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal, accounting, or tax advice. In the case of multiple owners, multiple contributions, group structures, capital deficits, or larger amounts, a qualified advisor should be consulted.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48071519666518,"sku":"7350139912549","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/villkorat-aktieagartillskott-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791161839"},{"product_id":"conditional-shareholder-contribution-template-english-template","title":"Conditional Shareholder Contribution – English Word\/PDF + Swedish Reference + Guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConditional Shareholder Contribution – English-first template under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e for Swedish limited companies that need to document a shareholder contribution which strengthens equity while preserving a conditional right to future repayment. The package also includes a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 5 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against Swedish corporate-law rules on value transfers and distributions, current guidance from the Swedish Tax Agency and Accounting Standards Board, and relevant case law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish template – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable conditional shareholder contribution agreement.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish template – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version of the same document.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed guidance with examples and repayment logic.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference template – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for bilingual organisations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish reference guide corresponding to the English version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eNot the same as a shareholder loan\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is deliberately structured so that the contribution strengthens the company's equity. \u003cstrong\u003eThe company does not undertake an unconditional repayment debt when the contribution is made.\u003c\/strong\u003e Instead, the repayment condition is directed toward the shareholders and depends on a future lawful resolution when repayment is legally possible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy the structure matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish Tax Agency guidance makes clear that the actual repayment terms are crucial. If the repayment claim is directed against the company as an unconditional debt, the transaction may instead be treated as a liability rather than a conditional shareholder contribution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe template covers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecompany and contributor details,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtribution amount and payment details,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econditions for future repayment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003erequirement for a lawful future general-meeting resolution,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epriority between several conditional shareholder contributions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etransfer of the repayment right,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecompany acknowledgement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eaccession\/acceptance by other shareholders where relevant,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003egoverning law, dispute clause and signatures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRepayment requires more than available cash\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder Swedish law, repayment of a conditional shareholder contribution is treated civilly as a distribution\/value transfer. This means that distributable reserves must be available, the capital-protection and prudence rules must be satisfied, and the general meeting must make a valid decision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is therefore no automatic right to repayment on a predetermined date merely because the contribution has been made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePriority between several contributions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company already has one or more conditional shareholder contributions, the order of priority should be documented. The template provides options for equal priority, subordinated priority and another expressly agreed ranking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTransfer of the repayment right\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe right to future repayment may need to be handled separately from the shares, for example in connection with a share sale. The package therefore includes a specific section on transfer and consent, together with guidance on documenting ownership changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAccounting and tax considerations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish accounting guidance treats received shareholder contributions as equity. For the contributor, accounting and tax treatment may differ from an unconditional contribution. The Swedish Tax Agency also treats the repayment right separately in capital-gains calculations. Larger contributions, group structures and ownership changes may justify separate legal, accounting and tax advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInterest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe standard template does not provide for running interest before a future repayment decision. Swedish Tax Agency guidance states that the company does not have a debt-like obligation toward the contributor until the general meeting has decided on repayment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is the primary document in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference for Swedish boards, accountants, advisers and bilingual ownership structures. Both versions are designed for \u003cstrong\u003eSwedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e, not UK, US or other foreign company law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain the difference between a conditional shareholder contribution and a loan, how the template is completed, why the repayment condition is directed toward shareholders, how future repayment works, priority, transferability, accounting, tax, ownership changes and common mistakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/mall-villkorat-aktieagartillskott-tillskottshandling\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first package? See the Swedish product →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the company promise repayment on a fixed date?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat should generally be avoided in a standard conditional shareholder contribution. An unconditional due date and direct repayment obligation can make the arrangement resemble a loan or debt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo the other shareholders need to accept the condition?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhere the repayment condition is intended to bind future shareholder voting, the relevant shareholders should accept the arrangement. The template includes a dedicated accession\/acceptance section.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the repayment right be transferred separately from the shares?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Swedish Tax Agency guidance recognises separate transfer of the repayment right, so the transfer should be documented clearly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan repayment be made as soon as the company is profitable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot automatically. The requirements for distributable reserves, capital protection, prudence and a lawful general-meeting resolution must first be satisfied.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal, accounting or tax advice. More complex ownership structures, multiple contributions or larger amounts may require professional review.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48071632126294,"sku":"7350139912556","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/conditional-shareholder-contribution-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791162312"},{"product_id":"mall-ovillkorat-aktieagartillskott-tillskottshandling","title":"Unconditional shareholder contribution – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUnconditional shareholder contribution – complete contribution document for Swedish limited companies\u003c\/strong\u003e with Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides. The package is designed for situations where a shareholder wishes to strengthen the company's equity permanently without creating a debt or retaining the right to future repayment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review includes current guidance from the Swedish Tax Agency (Skatteverket), the Accounting Standards Board's rules on shareholder contributions, and the Swedish Companies Registration Office's (Bolagsverket) information on registration and share capital.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish contribution document – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for an unconditional shareholder contribution.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish contribution document – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUnconditional Shareholder Contribution – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF with a practical example.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eUnconditional means no right to repayment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn unconditional shareholder contribution is provided \u003cstrong\u003ewithout any requirement for repayment\u003c\/strong\u003e. The contributor does not acquire a claim against the company, nor does the contribution document create interest or a due date. This is the key difference compared to a conditional shareholder contribution and a loan.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is this template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is intended for Swedish limited companies where an existing shareholder wants to strengthen the company's financial position permanently, for example in cases of capital deficiency, financing of operations, or ahead of investments and credit assessments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template covers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe company and the contributor,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtribution amount and date,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003emethod of payment or other form of contribution,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eexplicit waiver of any right to repayment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econfirmation that no interest, amortization, or security is created,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eaccounting and documentation intent,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe company's acknowledgement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eapplicable law, dispute resolution, and signatures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStrengthens equity – but does not automatically change share capital\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency describes unconditional shareholder contributions as pure capital injections without repayment obligations. The Accounting Standards Board states that received shareholder contributions are recognized as an increase in retained earnings. The contribution does not, however, automatically increase the company's registered share capital and does not in itself imply the issuance of new shares.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNo registration of the contribution itself with the Swedish Companies Registration Office\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket) does not register the shareholder contribution itself. If the company later wishes to transfer funds from unrestricted equity to share capital, a bonus issue, for example, may be a separate corporate law measure requiring its own decisions and registration requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGeneral tax principle\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency states that an unconditional shareholder contribution is generally not taxable income for the recipient company. The contributor generally has no ongoing right of deduction, but the amount may as a rule be added to the acquisition cost of the shares.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAccounting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBFNAR 2025:2 states that a received shareholder contribution shall be recognized as an increase in the item \"retained earnings\" when the commitment is received. For companies providing shareholder contributions and applying the K2 framework, the rules state that the contribution increases the carrying amount of the shares when the commitment is made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWaiver of claims and other forms of contributions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be adapted for cash contributions or the waiver\/conversion of a claim. In the event of a waiver of a claim, non-cash property, group relations, or other more complex transactions, specific valuation, accounting, and tax issues may arise, and separate advice may be needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf only one of several shareholders provides a contribution\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn unconditional contribution may increase the value of all shares in the company. If the contribution is provided disproportionately by only one of several shareholders, shareholder agreements, ownership balances, and potential tax consequences should be reviewed before the document is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCapital deficiency and control balance sheet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn unconditional shareholder contribution can strengthen the company's equity, but it does not replace the board's obligation to independently assess whether the rules regarding a control balance sheet have been triggered. If there is reason to assume a capital deficiency, that issue must be handled without delay.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e and is suitable for Swedish companies with international owners, board members, or an English corporate language. It is not intended as a template according to British, American, or other foreign corporate law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains the difference between unconditional contributions, conditional contributions, and loans, how to fill out the template, accounting, taxes, the Swedish Companies Registration Office, capital deficiency, waiver of claims, and common mistakes. A concrete example is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/mall-villkorat-aktieagartillskott-tillskottshandling\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you want to retain the possibility of future repayment? See the template for a conditional shareholder contribution →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product will be sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I get back an unconditional shareholder contribution?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a repayment according to the contribution document. An unconditional contribution is provided without any right to repayment. Any potential future dividend or other value transfer is assessed separately according to the Companies Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the contribution increase the company's registered share capital?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The contribution strengthens equity but does not in itself change the registered share capital or the number of shares.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the shareholder contribution be registered with the Swedish Companies Registration Office?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Swedish Companies Registration Office explicitly states that the shareholder contribution itself is not registered.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the contribution be provided by a shareholder waiving a claim?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but accounting, valuation, and taxes can be more complex than with a cash contribution. Separate documentation and advice may therefore be appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal, accounting, or tax advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48071766638934,"sku":"7350139912563","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/ovillkorat-aktieagartillskott-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791163291"},{"product_id":"enkelt-skuldebrev-mall-juridiskt-bindande","title":"Simple promissory note – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSimple Promissory Note – complete template package for loans under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e with Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides. The package is designed to document a loan to a specific creditor with clear terms regarding the principal amount, repayment, interest, late payment, assignment, and any collateral.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Promissory Notes Act, the Interest Act, the Statute of Limitations Act, the Contracts Act, and specific consumer credit regulations where applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish simple promissory note – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template for private and commercial loans.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish simple promissory note – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSimple Promissory Note – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eWhat is a simple promissory note?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA simple promissory note is issued to a \u003cstrong\u003especific creditor\u003c\/strong\u003e. It differs from a negotiable promissory note and is subject to different rules regarding, for example, assignment. This new template is therefore specifically designed for a clear loan between identified parties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template covers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecreditor\/lender and debtor\/borrower,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprincipal amount and actual disbursement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efixed due date, amortization schedule, or repayment upon demand,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003einterest-free loan or agreed standard interest,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epenalty interest and handling of late payments,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eearly repayment,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eoptional clause for early acceleration (default),\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate handling of collateral or guarantees,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eassignment of claims,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epayment details, notices, and documentation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003echoice of law, dispute resolution, and signatures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIntegrated amortization schedule\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a table for amortizations specifying the due date, principal, interest\/fees, and total payment. This makes it easier to document a loan that is to be repaid in multiple installments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInterest and penalty interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe parties can choose between an interest-free loan and an agreed annual interest rate. For late payments, there is a clear option to use the Interest Act’s standard rule of the reference rate plus eight percentage points, while the template also allows for other valid terms where permitted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEarly repayment and early acceleration\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template makes it possible to allow the borrower to repay all or part of the debt early. A separate, optional clause regarding early acceleration (default) is included for significant payment delays, but it is worded cautiously as mandatory regulations may limit how such a clause can be used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAssignment of a simple promissory note\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen assigning a simple promissory note, the new creditor does not, as a general rule, acquire better rights against the debtor than the previous creditor had. The template therefore includes options for free assignment or requirements for the debtor's consent, as well as guidance on written notification and new payment instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCollateral and guarantees kept legally separate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the loan is to be secured by collateral or personal guarantees, this is marked in the promissory note, but the security itself should be documented in a separate pledge or guarantee agreement. This reduces the risk of ambiguity regarding the scope of the security and when it may be claimed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStatute of limitations and evidence\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide explains the central limitation rules and why the parties should save the signed promissory note, proof of payment, amortization history, payment demands, and any acknowledgments. Different limitation periods may apply to ordinary claims versus consumer claims.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #f0c7b0;border-radius:12px;background:#fff7f2\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant regarding loans from traders to consumers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis template is primarily intended for private and commercial loans. If a trader provides credit to a consumer, mandatory consumer credit regulations may require, among other things, specific pre-contractual information, credit assessment, and more extensive contractual documentation. Therefore, do not use the standard promissory note as the sole document in such lending.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLoans between limited companies and owners\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf a limited company lends money to a shareholder, board member, CEO, or related party, the Swedish Companies Act's specific rules regarding prohibited loans may apply. This issue must be checked separately before the promissory note is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish businesses or private individuals who need to document the loan in English. It is not intended as a British, American, or other foreign promissory note.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide covers the difference between simple and negotiable promissory notes, payment receipts, amortization, interest, penalty interest, early repayment, security, assignment, statute of limitations, applications for summary proceedings (betalningsföreläggande), consumer credit, and loans between companies and owners.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a simple promissory note need to be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWitnesses are generally not a formal requirement for an ordinary simple promissory note, but the template includes optional witness lines that can be used if the parties desire additional evidence.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the promissory note be interest-free?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The template has an explicit option for an interest-free loan. If interest is to be charged, the interest rate, calculation basis, and payment terms should be clearly stated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the lender sell or assign the claim?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, a simple claim can normally be assigned, but the parties can agree on restrictions. The template includes both options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the template sufficient for a company's consumer loan?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot always. Professional lending to consumers is subject to specific mandatory rules and may require additional documentation and controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation support tool and does not replace individual legal, tax, or credit law advice. In cases involving large amounts, collateral, consumer credit, or loans between companies and related parties, qualified professional advice should be sought.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48072242757974,"sku":"7350139912570","price":29.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/enkelt-skuldebrev-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791164512"},{"product_id":"faktura-mall-gratis-dokumentmall-word-pdf","title":"Invoice template company – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice template for companies\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete, free template package for Swedish companies wanting to create clear and professional customer invoices with the correct basic information. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally and tax-reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the invoice requirements of the Value Added Tax Act, accounting regulations, specific details for limited companies, as well as rules regarding payment terms and late payment interest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's included in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish invoice template – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable, complete company invoice.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish invoice template – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice Template – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eBuilt for a complete invoice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Value Added Tax Act specifies the information a complete invoice must contain. The new template therefore has dedicated fields for the invoice date, unique sequential number, VAT number, buyer and seller, delivery\/performance date, a concrete description of the goods or services, taxable base, discounts, tax rate, and tax amount.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template contains\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003einvoice number, invoice date, and due date,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edelivery\/performance date,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecurrency, customer reference, and PO\/purchase order,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseller's company name, organization number, address, and VAT number,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebuyer's full name, address, and VAT number when required,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003equantity\/type of goods or scope\/type of service,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eunit price excluding VAT, discount, and taxable base,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparate fields for 25%, 12%, and 6% VAT,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVAT amount and total amount payable,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBankgiro\/Plusgiro, account, IBAN, and BIC\/SWIFT,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epayment terms and late payment interest,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003especific VAT references and internal checklist.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSpecific details for limited companies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA Swedish limited company's invoices must contain the registered company name, the municipality where the board of directors has its registered office, and the organization number. The new template therefore has separate fields for this information so it is not missed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMultiple tax rates on the same invoice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf different goods or services are subject to different tax rates, the taxable base must be reported per tax rate. The template contains separate summations for 25, 12, and 6 percent. The applicable tax rate depends on what is actually being sold.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs of April 1, 2026, for example, groceries are normally 6 percent, while restaurant services continue to be subject to 12 percent. Therefore, the correct VAT category should always be verified for the specific sale.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompanies with low annual turnover\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCompanies based in Sweden may, under certain conditions, be covered by the exemption from VAT liability when the annual turnover is no more than SEK 120,000 during the calendar year and has not exceeded the limit during any of the two preceding calendar years. When the exemption applies, VAT must not be charged on the covered transactions, and the invoice must contain information that the sale is exempt according to Chapter 18, Section 4 of the Value Added Tax Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReverse charge and special cases\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains optional lines for, e.g., \u003cstrong\u003ereverse charge\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003eself-billing\u003c\/strong\u003e, and VAT-exempt sales. These texts should not be used as standard – only when the specific transaction is actually covered by that rule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePayment terms and late payment interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYou can specify both agreed payment terms and late payment interest. When the standard rule of the Interest Act applies, the late payment interest is calculated using the reference rate plus eight percentage points. When the interest begins to accrue depends, among other things, on how the due date was determined and what the parties have agreed upon.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAccounting and archiving\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvoices are normally accounting information. The Swedish Accounting Standards Board (Bokföringsnämnden) states that accounting information must be saved for seven years after the end of the calendar year in which the financial year ended. The guide also explains how customer invoices should be handled and saved in the company's accounting routines.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish version under Swedish law\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English invoice template is a \u003cstrong\u003elanguage version under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish companies that work with international customers or use English as a corporate or working language. It is not intended as a British, American, or other foreign tax invoice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide covers complete and simplified invoices, mandatory information, limited company details, tax rates, low annual turnover, EU trade, reverse charge, payment terms, late payment interest, accounting, archiving, and common mistakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/fakturamall-privatperson\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAre you a private individual? See our invoice\/payment document for private individuals instead →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrice:\u003c\/strong\u003e free.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat information must be included on a regular company invoice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA complete invoice must, among other things, include the invoice date, a unique sequential number, the seller's VAT number, the names and addresses of the parties, a concrete description of the delivery, the taxable base, the applied tax rate, and the VAT amount. Special cases may require additional information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the same invoice number multiple times?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A complete invoice must have a unique sequential number based on one or more series.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used if the company is exempt from VAT liability?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. In that case, remove the VAT amounts and use only the specific reference regarding the exemption when the conditions are actually met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the template for EU invoices?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn principle, it can be used, but cross-border sales may require verification of the VAT number, country of taxation, and special references. The guide therefore notes that these situations should be checked separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general invoicing aid and does not replace individual VAT, tax, or accounting advice. Special cases such as EU trade, construction services, profit margin taxation, and credit notes should always be checked against the Swedish Tax Agency's (Skatteverket) current rules.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48095593595222,"sku":"7350139912617","price":0.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/fakturamall-foretag-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791168189"},{"product_id":"generalfullmakt-mall-word-pdf","title":"General Power of Attorney – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\n\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral Power of Attorney – comprehensive template package according to Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e with Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides. The package is designed for individuals and companies needing to grant an agent broad, yet clearly defined, authority to represent the principal in financial, administrative, and other permitted legal transactions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 5, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the power of attorney rules of the Contracts Act, specific formal requirements for real estate, and current guidance on bank powers of attorney and the distinction between a standard power of attorney and an enduring power of attorney (framtidsfullmakt).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish General Power of Attorney – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable master template with selectable powers and restrictions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish General Power of Attorney – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral Power of Attorney – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF, designed for Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed step-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA general power of attorney does not mean unlimited rights\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA broad power of attorney can cover many different legal transactions, but the authority is determined by \u003cstrong\u003ewhat is actually stated in the power of attorney\u003c\/strong\u003e and by special rules for certain types of matters. The new template therefore uses selectable authorizations, monetary limits, and specific restrictions rather than a general assertion that the agent may do \"everything\".\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template can cover\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eongoing financial management and payments,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eentering into, amending, and terminating contracts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtact with authorities and public bodies,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003einsurance, subscriptions, and supplier agreements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereceivables, debts, and payment arrangements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebanking matters to the extent accepted by the bank,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esecurities and financial assets according to specific instructions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereal estate and tenant-owned properties when specific authorization is stated,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother explicitly stated financial or administrative matters.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAuthority and internal instructions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn practice, the Contracts Act distinguishes between what the agent is authorized to do externally and the internal instructions provided by the principal. If a restriction is important, it should therefore be stated directly in the power of attorney that a third party will see. The template includes specific fields for prohibited actions, monetary limits, and other instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReal estate – specific formal requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor agreements regarding the \u003cstrong\u003epurchase, exchange, or gift of real estate\u003c\/strong\u003e, Section 27 of the Contracts Act requires the power of attorney to be in writing. The template therefore includes a separate real estate section where the property, the type of legal transaction, and price and condition limits can be clearly stated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor title registration and other land registration matters, additional documents may need to be submitted to the Swedish Mapping, Cadastral and Land Registration Authority (Lantmäteriet).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBanking matters – bank-specific requirements may apply\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general statutory requirement for a standard form for a standard power of attorney, but banks often have their own security requirements. They may require a written and witnessed power of attorney, and in some cases, that the bank's own form be used. The template therefore includes a clear bank section and a reminder that the bank's routines should be verified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBankID and personal security solutions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney does not imply that the agent may use the principal's personal BankID, security token, PIN code, or other personal authentication credentials. Such solutions are governed by the respective provider's terms and conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGifts and conflicts of interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA very broad authority to make gifts can create significant risk. The new template therefore has separate options to prohibit gifts, limit them to customary personal presents, or provide an explicit gift instruction. It also highlights the risks associated with legal transactions where the agent themselves or their next of kin benefit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eValidity and revocation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney can be made for an indefinite period, for a limited time, or tied to a specific assignment. The Contracts Act contains different rules on revocation depending on how the power of attorney was made known. For a written power of attorney held and presented by the agent, the document should be retrieved or destroyed, and third parties who have registered or are aware of the power of attorney should be notified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #d6dce3;border-radius:12px;background:#f7f5f2\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant regarding death and future incapacity\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA standard power of attorney \u003cstrong\u003edoes not automatically cease simply because the principal dies\u003c\/strong\u003e. The Contracts Act contains a special rule on continued effect unless special circumstances suggest otherwise. If the principal is placed under guardianship, however, the effect of the power of attorney may be limited within the scope of the guardian's assignment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the purpose is for someone to be able to represent you only when you are no longer able to manage your affairs, you should consider an \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/framtidsfullmakt-mall-juridiskt-bindande\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eenduring power of attorney (framtidsfullmakt)\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e instead.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNot for strictly personal legal transactions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA general power of attorney is not intended for actions that by law or by their nature must be performed personally, such as executing a will or entering into marriage. Special rules may also limit representation in other situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVoluntary witnesses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA standard general power of attorney has no general statutory requirement for witnessing. Witnesses can nevertheless be used as additional proof, and certain banks or other recipients may have their own requirements. The new template therefore provides optional witness fields without incorrectly claiming that witnessing is always required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish individuals and companies who need an English-language document but where the power of attorney must still be assessed according to Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/generalfullmakt-mall-engelska-general-power-of-attorney\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNeed an English-first product page? See General Power of Attorney – Swedish law →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide covers how to complete the template, the distinction between authority and internal instructions, bank requirements, real estate power of attorney, gifts and conflicts of interest, revocation, death, guardianship, and when a special power of attorney or enduring power of attorney is more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a general power of attorney completely unlimited?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The scope is determined by the wording of the power of attorney, applicable legal rules, and the requirements of the recipient. This template is intentionally built with selectable powers and restrictions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the general power of attorney be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not as a general rule. However, banks and other recipients may have their own requirements for witnessing or a specific form.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the agent buy or sell real estate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis can be included if the authority is clearly stated. For agreements regarding the purchase, exchange, or gift of real estate, the power of attorney must be in writing according to Section 27 of the Contracts Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the power of attorney cease automatically when the principal dies?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not according to the general rule of the Contracts Act. Section 21 contains a special rule on continued effect, but special circumstances may mean that the power of attorney is considered to have expired.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a general power of attorney the same as an enduring power of attorney (framtidsfullmakt)?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. An enduring power of attorney is regulated by a special law and is specifically intended for the situation where the principal can no longer manage their affairs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. In the case of real estate transactions, major capital management, corporate issues, gifts to the agent or next of kin, international circumstances, or other high financial risks, qualified advice should be considered.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48105885073750,"sku":"7350139912631","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/generalfullmakt-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791178397"},{"product_id":"generalfullmakt-mall-engelska-general-power-of-attorney","title":"General Power of Attorney – English Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral Power of Attorney – English-first template under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e for individuals and businesses that need to authorise another person to act on their behalf in financial, administrative and other permitted legal matters. The package includes an English Word\/PDF template, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 5 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against the Swedish Contracts Act rules on authority and revocation, the special written-form requirement for certain real-estate transactions and current guidance on bank powers of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral Power of Attorney – English Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable primary template under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral Power of Attorney – English PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed step-by-step guidance for use under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference template – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for bilingual organisations and advisers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish reference guidance corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eBroad authority does not mean unlimited authority\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA general power of attorney can cover many different legal acts, but the agent's authority is determined by \u003cstrong\u003ethe wording of the document\u003c\/strong\u003e and by any special legal rules that apply to the transaction. This template therefore uses selectable powers, monetary limits and specific restrictions rather than claiming that the agent may simply do “everything”.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe template can cover\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eday-to-day financial administration and payments,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eentering into, changing and terminating contracts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtacts with public authorities and other organisations,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003einsurance, subscriptions and supplier agreements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eclaims, debts and payment arrangements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebank matters to the extent accepted by the relevant bank,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esecurities and financial assets where expressly authorised,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereal estate and condominium\/co-operative housing matters where specifically stated,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother expressly defined financial or administrative matters.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAuthority and internal instructions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSwedish agency law distinguishes between the agent's outward authority and the principal's internal instructions. If a restriction is important, it should therefore be stated directly in the document shown to third parties. The template contains dedicated fields for prohibited actions, monetary limits and other instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReal estate – written authority required\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder section 27 of the Swedish Contracts Act, authority to enter into an agreement for the \u003cstrong\u003epurchase, exchange or gift of real property\u003c\/strong\u003e must be in writing. The template therefore contains a separate real-estate section where the property, transaction type and any price or condition limits can be specified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAdditional documents may be required for land-registration matters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBank matters – the bank may impose its own requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general statutory form that every ordinary power of attorney must follow. Banks may nevertheless require a written and witnessed power of attorney and may insist on their own form. The package therefore includes a dedicated banking section and a clear reminder to check the bank's current procedures before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBankID and personal security credentials\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney does not authorise the agent to use the principal's personal BankID, security token, PIN code or other personal authentication credentials. Those services are governed by the relevant provider's terms and security rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGifts and conflicts of interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eVery broad gift authority can create significant risk. The template therefore includes options to prohibit gifts, limit them to customary personal gifts or add an explicit gift instruction. It also highlights transactions in which the agent or a related person could benefit personally.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eValidity and revocation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney can be made indefinite, time-limited or linked to a specific assignment. The Swedish Contracts Act contains different revocation rules depending on how the power of attorney has been communicated. A written instrument held and presented by the agent should generally be recovered or destroyed when revoked, and third parties that have registered or relied on the authority should be informed where relevant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #d6dce3;border-radius:12px;background:#f7f5f2\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant: death and future incapacity\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn ordinary Swedish power of attorney does \u003cstrong\u003enot automatically terminate solely because the principal dies\u003c\/strong\u003e. Section 21 of the Swedish Contracts Act contains a specific rule under which the authority may remain effective unless particular circumstances indicate otherwise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the purpose is instead to appoint someone who should act once you permanently lose the ability to manage your own affairs, consider a \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/framtidsfullmakt-mall-juridiskt-bindande\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFuture Power of Attorney\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e, which is governed by separate legislation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNot suitable for strictly personal legal acts\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA general power of attorney is not intended for acts that by law or their nature must be performed personally, such as making a will or entering into marriage. Other transactions can also be subject to special representation rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWitnesses are optional as a general rule\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general statutory requirement that an ordinary general power of attorney be witnessed. Witnesses can nevertheless provide additional evidence, and banks or other recipients may impose their own requirements. The template therefore contains optional witness fields without incorrectly presenting witnessing as mandatory in every case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in one package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary template in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference for Swedish boards, banks, advisers and bilingual organisations. This is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a UK, US or other foreign power of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/generalfullmakt-mall-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first product? See the Swedish Generalfullmakt package →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain how to complete the template, the difference between authority and internal instructions, bank requirements, real-estate authority, gifts and conflicts of interest, revocation, death, guardianship and when a special-purpose or future power of attorney may be more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a General Power of Attorney give unlimited authority?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The agent's powers depend on the wording of the document, applicable law and any requirements imposed by the receiving organisation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have to be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a general legal requirement. A bank or other recipient may nevertheless require witnesses or its own form.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the agent buy or sell real estate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat can be included if the authority is stated clearly. For agreements concerning the purchase, exchange or gift of real property, Swedish law requires written authority.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the power of attorney automatically end when the principal dies?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not under the general rule in section 21 of the Swedish Contracts Act. Particular circumstances can, however, mean that the authority should be treated as terminated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs this the same as a Future Power of Attorney?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A Future Power of Attorney is governed by separate Swedish legislation and is specifically designed for future permanent incapacity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. Real-estate transactions, substantial investment authority, corporate matters, gifts to agents or related persons, international arrangements or other high-value matters may require professional review.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48105908961622,"sku":"7350139912648","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/general-power-of-attorney-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791178871"},{"product_id":"lopande-skuldebrev-mall-word-pdf-foretag-privatperson","title":"Negotiable Promissory Note Template – Word\/PDF + English + Guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNegotiable promissory note – complete template package under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e with Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates and detailed user guides. The package is intended for companies and private individuals who specifically need a promissory note designed to be transferable under the special rules of the Swedish Promissory Notes Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Swedish Promissory Notes Act, Interest Act, Limitation Act and current and adopted consumer-credit legislation where applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish negotiable promissory note – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable template with a choice between an order note and a bearer note.\u003c\/td\u003e\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish negotiable promissory note – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNegotiable Promissory Note – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish-language Word + PDF version governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eDetailed guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eDetailed English guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eWhat makes a promissory note “negotiable”?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUnder Section 11 of the Swedish Promissory Notes Act, a promissory note is negotiable when it is made \u003cstrong\u003epayable to bearer\u003c\/strong\u003e or \u003cstrong\u003epayable to a specified person or order\u003c\/strong\u003e. This is not merely a heading. The wording affects who may enforce the claim and the legal consequences of a later transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOrder note or bearer note – choose one\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe main template contains two clearly separated alternatives that should not be used at the same time:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eOrder promissory note:\u003c\/strong\u003e payable to a named creditor or order and transferable through a traceable chain of endorsements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBearer promissory note:\u003c\/strong\u003e payable to the bearer. The person in possession of the original instrument is generally presumed to be entitled to demand payment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor many private and smaller commercial loans, an order note is easier to administer than a bearer note. If transferability is not needed at all, a \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/enkelt-skuldebrev-mall-juridiskt-bindande\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003esimple promissory note\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e is often a more controlled alternative.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAn important difference from a simple promissory note\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA new holder who acquires possession of a negotiable promissory note in good faith can, in certain situations under Section 15 of the Swedish Promissory Notes Act, be protected against objections that the debtor could have raised against the previous creditor. This is one of the most important reasons why negotiable promissory notes should be used with greater care.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOnly one signed original\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe previous version of the product recommended one original for each party. That is not appropriate for a negotiable promissory note. The new template and guide therefore use \u003cstrong\u003eone signed original only\u003c\/strong\u003e. The debtor may retain a clearly marked copy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhen the debt has been paid in full, the original instrument should be returned to the debtor and preferably marked as paid in full or cancelled. For interest and instalment payments, the package includes a separate receipt and payment-history schedule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template regulates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003edebtor\/borrower and original creditor\/lender,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003echoice between order and bearer promissory note,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eprincipal amount and evidence of disbursement,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003esingle payment, instalment plan or payment after notice,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003einterest-free loan or agreed ordinary interest,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003edefault interest,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eearly repayment and a cautiously drafted acceleration clause,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003etransfer and presentation of the original instrument,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eseparate pledge or guarantee arrangements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003epayment details, notices and special instructions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eendorsement fields for order notes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003epayment and receipt history.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInterest and default interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be used for both interest-free and interest-bearing loans. Where the default rule in Section 6 of the Swedish Interest Act applies to late payment, the rate corresponds to the reference rate plus eight percentage points. If the claim already bears interest, Section 7 may affect the rate after the due date.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLimitation periods – a special rule for negotiable promissory notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe main rule under the Swedish Limitation Act is ten years. The special three-year limitation period for certain consumer claims expressly \u003cstrong\u003edoes not apply\u003c\/strong\u003e to claims based on negotiable promissory notes. The guide therefore covers documentation of payments, demands and interruption of limitation periods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #f0c7b0;border-radius:12px;background:#fff7f2\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant for consumer credit purchases\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA negotiable promissory note is not a suitable standard document for all consumer-credit situations. In a credit purchase, a creditor may not accept a negotiable promissory note that restricts the consumer's right to raise objections if the instrument is later transferred or pledged to a good-faith creditor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe current Swedish Consumer Credit Act applies through 19 November 2026. The new Consumer Credit Act enters into force on 20 November 2026 and retains a corresponding prohibition. The package therefore clearly states that professional consumer lending may require different and more extensive documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEndorsements and payment history\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe order-note template includes an appendix with multiple endorsement fields so that transferor, transferee, date and acknowledgement can be documented together with the original instrument. A separate payment schedule makes it possible to track principal, interest, outstanding balance and acknowledgement after each payment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity – keep pledges and guarantees separate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the loan is secured by a pledge or guarantee, the promissory note can refer to a separate security document. The pledge or guarantee undertaking should itself be documented separately so that its scope, formal requirements and conditions remain clear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWitnesses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWitnessing is normally not a general formal requirement for a promissory note. The template contains optional witness fields for parties who want additional evidential support, without incorrectly presenting witnesses as a validity requirement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish companies and private individuals who need the document in English while the claim remains governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain, among other things:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe difference between negotiable and simple promissory notes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe difference between order and bearer notes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ewhy only one original should be signed,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ehow disbursement, instalments and interest are documented,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ehow transfers and endorsements are handled,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003erules on presentation and return of the original instrument,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003elimitation periods,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003econsumer-credit restrictions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003epledges, guarantees, witnesses and common mistakes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between a negotiable and a simple promissory note?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA negotiable promissory note is specifically designed for transfer and can give a good-faith new holder stronger legal protection. With a simple promissory note, a new creditor generally does not obtain better rights than the previous creditor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eShould both parties have an original?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. For a negotiable promissory note, normally only one original should be signed. The other party may keep a clearly marked copy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a negotiable promissory note be interest-free?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The template contains both interest-free and interest-bearing alternatives.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for consumer credit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a general standard document. Mandatory consumer-credit rules apply, and negotiable promissory notes are expressly prohibited in certain credit-purchase situations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the promissory note need witnesses?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a general rule. Optional witnesses may be used as additional evidential support.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal, credit-law or tax advice. For larger amounts, professional lending, international parties, complex security arrangements or planned trading in the claim, qualified advice should be considered.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48107547459926,"sku":"7350139912679","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/lopande-skuldebrev-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791244443"},{"product_id":"dispute-of-invoice-template-private-person-copy","title":"Invoice Dispute – Business (B2B) | English Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice Dispute – Business (B2B)\u003c\/strong\u003e is an English-first template package governed by Swedish law for companies that need to object to an invoice or other commercial payment claim. The package includes an English Word\/PDF template, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against the Swedish Sale of Goods Act, Interest Act, Debt Collection Act, limitation rules, current Finansinspektionen debt-collection regulations and the Swedish Enforcement Authority's payment-order procedure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice Dispute – Business English Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable primary B2B objection template under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eInvoice Dispute – Business English PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step B2B guidance covering contract review, interest, collection and Kronofogden.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvensk referensmall – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for bilingual companies and advisers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvensk referensguide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish guidance corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eB2B disputes are contract-driven\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBetween businesses, the contract, framework agreement, purchase order, accepted quotation and incorporated standard terms are often decisive. Swedish consumer legislation normally does not apply between two businesses. For sales of movable goods, the Swedish Sale of Goods Act may apply, but it is non-mandatory and can be displaced by agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe package can be used where a business disputes all or part of an invoice because, for example:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eno valid order or agreement exists,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe invoice differs from the contract, quotation, PO or agreed price list,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003egoods or services were not delivered or performed as agreed,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003egoods are defective or non-conforming and a complaint has been made,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003equantity, hours, unit price, VAT, rebate or another calculation is incorrect,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe invoice is a duplicate or has already been paid,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ea credit note, return, price reduction or other agreed adjustment is missing,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe company relies on a counterclaim or set-off, subject to the applicable legal requirements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003einterest, collection costs or late-payment compensation are disputed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eA dispute does not automatically invalidate the invoice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA written objection documents the debtor company's position and the factual and contractual basis for the objection. It does not itself determine whether the creditor's claim is legally valid. If the parties cannot agree, the dispute may need to be determined by a court or, where agreed, through arbitration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFull or partial objection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template separates the total invoiced amount, the disputed amount and any undisputed amount. If only part of the invoice is disputed, the company should consider handling the undisputed part in accordance with the contract while clearly reserving its position regarding the remainder.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGoods, services and the contract chain\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor B2B sales of movable goods, the Sale of Goods Act can apply unless the agreement provides otherwise. The Act gives the buyer remedies for delay and defects and may permit the buyer to withhold a corresponding part of the payment. Because the Act is non-mandatory, the agreed terms, acceptance procedure, complaint periods and liability clauses must always be checked first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor B2B services there is no single general Swedish statute equivalent to the Consumer Services Act. Contracts, industry terms and general contract-law principles therefore often carry greater weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003e30-day B2B payment rule\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Interest Act contains special commercial-payment rules. A claim for payment for goods or services between businesses is due no later than 30 days after the creditor has demanded payment unless the creditor expressly approved a longer payment period. This rule concerns when payment may be required; it does not prevent a debtor from disputing a claim that is contractually or factually incorrect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDefault interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf a due date was fixed in advance, statutory default interest can normally run from that date. Where the statutory rate applies, it is the current reference rate plus eight percentage points. Contractual interest provisions may affect the result and should be reviewed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSEK 450 late-payment compensation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWhere the statutory conditions are met in a commercial claim for goods or services, a business creditor may also be entitled to \u003cstrong\u003eSEK 450 in late-payment compensation\u003c\/strong\u003e. If that compensation applies, separate reminder and collection-cost compensation is generally recoverable only to the extent that the combined compensation exceeds SEK 450. The new template therefore has a separate option for disputing additional charges rather than treating them as automatically valid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDebt collection and current FI rules\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the claim is sent to debt collection, do not ignore the new demand. Send the objection to the collection company as well and attach the earlier dispute and relevant supporting material. Finansinspektionen's regulations and general guidance \u003cstrong\u003eFFFS 2025:2\u003c\/strong\u003e have applied since 1 July 2025. Where a debtor has a factually grounded objection, the collection company should investigate the matter, obtain the creditor's position and inform the debtor of the result.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #f0c7b0;border-radius:12px;background:#fff7f2\"\u003e\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eKronofogden – particularly important for companies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company receives an order for payment from Kronofogden, it must object directly to Kronofogden within the time stated in the notice. A previous objection to the supplier or debt-collection company does \u003cstrong\u003enot\u003c\/strong\u003e replace this step.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor companies and other legal entities, the application itself can also have credit-reporting consequences. The company should therefore have procedures for identifying and responding to incorrect payment-order applications immediately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSet-off and counterclaims\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains an option to state that a counterclaim or set-off is relied upon, but this should only be used after verifying that the legal and contractual conditions for set-off are actually met. Complex or substantial counterclaims should normally be reviewed by legal counsel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLimitation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe general Swedish limitation period is normally ten years for ordinary B2B claims, but limitation can be interrupted and special rules may apply. Do not state that a claim is time-barred without checking the full payment and correspondence history.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDispute-resolution clauses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck whether the agreement directs disputes to an ordinary Swedish court or to arbitration. Arbitration may involve substantial costs and can materially affect strategy. International contracts can also contain foreign governing-law or jurisdiction clauses that change the analysis.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in one package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary version in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference for Swedish counterparties, boards, accounting functions and advisers. This is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a UK, US or other foreign-law invoice-dispute template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/bestridande-faktura-foretag\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first package? See Bestridande av faktura – Företag →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain the contract chain, partial objections, B2B payment terms, default interest, late-payment compensation, current debt-collection rules, Kronofogden, set-off, limitation, arbitration and when legal advice should be obtained.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes disputing an invoice automatically make it invalid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It documents that the company rejects all or part of the claim and why. The underlying contractual dispute still has to be resolved between the parties or ultimately determined through the agreed dispute-resolution process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes Swedish consumer law apply between two companies?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNormally not. B2B disputes are primarily governed by the agreement, applicable commercial legislation and general contract-law principles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan we dispute only part of the invoice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Clearly identify the disputed amount and the basis for the objection. Any undisputed part should be handled separately under the contract.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat if the invoice has gone to debt collection?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eObject to the collection company as well and attach the earlier objection. A factually grounded dispute should be investigated under current debt-collection practice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat if Kronofogden contacts the company?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRespond directly within the time stated in the notice. A prior objection to the supplier or collection company does not replace an objection to Kronofogden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. High-value claims, arbitration, set-off, international contracts or pending proceedings may require professional review.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48167782613334,"sku":"7350139912693","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/invoice-dispute-business-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791246324"},{"product_id":"control-balance-sheet-template-engelska-swedish-law","title":"Kontrollbalansräkning – engelsk Excel\/PDF + svensk referens + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eKontrollbalansräkning – Engelskspråkig Excel-mall enligt svensk rätt\u003c\/strong\u003e för svenska aktiebolag som behöver bedöma kapitalbrist enligt 25 kap. aktiebolagslagen. Paketet innehåller en automatiserad engelsk Excel-arbetsbok, en svensk referensarbetsbok, utskriftsvänliga PDF-versioner och detaljerade användargestuider på båda språken.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJuridiskt och redovisningsmässigt granskad: 6 oktober 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eGranskad mot 25 kap. aktiebolagslagen, aktuell BFN-vägledning för kontrollbalansräkningar, K2\/K3-principer och gällande svenska skatteregler.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVad ingår?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEngelsk kontrollbalansräkning – Excel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eAutomatiserad arbetsbok med indata, justeringar, kapitaltest, kontroller och styrelseunderskrifter.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEngelsk utskriftsvänlig PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStatisk utskrift för dokumentation och manuell ifyllnad.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvensk referens-Excel + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eMatchande svenska referensversioner för styrelser, revisorer och rådgivare.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEngelska + svenska användarguider\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eDetaljerade Word\/PDF-guider som täcker den juridiska processen, värderingsjusteringar och vanliga misstag.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eEn kontrollbalansräkning är inte ett insolvenstest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDet lagstadgade kravet avser \u003cstrong\u003ekapitalbrist\u003c\/strong\u003e. Styrelsen ska genast upprätta en kontrollbalansräkning när det finns skäl att anta att det egna kapitalet, beräknat enligt 25 kap. 14 §, understiger hälften av det registrerade aktiekapitalet, eller när lagens särskilda tvingande skäl för upprättande föreligger. Insolvens och oförmåga att betala skulder är separata juridiska frågor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAutomatiserade juridiska tröskelvärden\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExcel-arbetsboken beräknar och visar:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eeget kapital enligt kontrollbalansräkningen,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ehälften av det registrerade aktiekapitalet,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edet fulla registrerade aktiekapitalet,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003evarning för kapitalstatus,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003evägledning för datum för andra kontrollstämma när datum för första kontrollstämma har angetts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epåminnelser om revisorsstatus.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHälften av aktiekapitalet vs fullt aktiekapital\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOm kontrollbalansräkningen visar att det egna kapitalet understiger hälften av det registrerade aktiekapitalet måste styrelsen snarast kalla till en första kontrollstämma för att pröva frågan om likvidation. Om den första kontrollstämman inte visar att det \u003cstrong\u003efulla registrerade aktiekapitalet\u003c\/strong\u003e har återställts och beslut om likvidation inte fattas, måste en andra kontrollstämma i regel hållas inom åtta månader. Det är alltså inte tillräckligt att bara återställa kapitalet till hälften-nivån innan den andra stämman.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eByggd för justeringar enligt 25 kap. 14 §\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eArbetsboken separerar ordinarie bokförda värden från kontrollbalansjusteringar och tillhandahåller dedikerade dokumentationsfält. Den stödjer:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etillåtna justeringar av tillgångsvärden där det stöds av god redovisningssed,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003enettoförsäljningsvärde där lagstadgade förutsättningar är uppfyllda,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etillåtna reduceringar av avsättningar eller skulder,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eseparat dokumentation av varje justering,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003euppdelning av obeskattade reserver i en kapitaldel och uppskjuten skatteskuld.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eObeskattade reserver och skatteberäkning\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eArbetsboken fördelar automatiskt obeskattade reserver med hjälp av en skattesats-input. Den är förinställd på \u003cstrong\u003e20,6 %\u003c\/strong\u003e, vilket är den nuvarande svenska bolagsskattesatsen, men inputfältet är redigerbart då den faktiska skatteeffekten alltid bör verifieras för bolaget och den specifika balansposten.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eK2 och K3\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBFN anger att ett mindre företag kan använda K3 istället för K2 vid upprättande av kontrollbalansräkning. Ett större företag får inte använda K2, och K2 och K3 bör inte blandas i samma kontrollbalansräkning. Arbetsboken innehåller därför ett tydligt val för K2\/K3-ramverk och användarguiden förklarar skillnaden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRevisors- och styrelseunderskrifter\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOm bolaget har revisor granskar denne kontrollbalansräkningen. Själva kontrollbalansräkningen måste undertecknas av styrelsen. Arbetsboken innehåller ett fält för revisorsstatus och ett separat blad för styrelseunderskrifter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRisk för personligt betalningsansvar\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnderlåtenhet att följa den lagstadgade processen för kontrollbalansräkning kan leda till personligt betalningsansvar för bolagets förpliktelser som uppstår under perioden av bristande efterlevnad. Paketet betonar därför datum, dokumentation, styrelseprocessen samt skillnaden mellan första och andra kontrollstämma.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eArbetsbokens struktur\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSTART\u003c\/strong\u003e – bolagsuppgifter, aktiekapital, datum, K2\/K3, revisorsstatus och skattesats.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eJUSTERINGAR\u003c\/strong\u003e – ordinarie bokförda värden, tillåtna KBR-justeringar och stödjande dokumentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eKONTROLLBALANS\u003c\/strong\u003e – automatiserad balans och kapitalberäkning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eKONTROLLER\u003c\/strong\u003e – formelbaserade varningar och rimlighetskontroller.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUNDERSKRIFTER\u003c\/strong\u003e – dedikerad sida för styrelsens underskrifter.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEngelska + svenska i ett paket\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDen engelska arbetsboken är den primära versionen i denna produkt. Den svenska arbetsboken ingår som referens för svenska styrelser, redovisningskonsulter, revisorer och rådgivare. Detta är en \u003cstrong\u003eengelskspråkig mall styrd av svensk rätt\u003c\/strong\u003e, inte en utländsk balansräkningsmall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/kontrollbalansrakning-mall-utan-revisor\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFöredrar du ett svenskspråkigt paket för ett bolag utan revisor? Se Kontrollbalansräkning utan revisor →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/kontrollbalansrakning-mall-med-revisor\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHar bolaget revisor? Se det svenskspråkiga paketet med revisorsarbetsflöde →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eViktig omfattning\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePaketet är utformat för vanliga icke-finansiella svenska aktiebolag. Finansiella företag och bolag som omfattas av branschspecifika kapital- eller redovisningsregler kan kräva annan hantering. Värdeuppskrivningar av tillgångar, tvistiga fordringar, komplexa skatteeffekter, koncernstrukturer eller osäkerhet kring personligt betalningsansvar bör granskas av en kvalificerad redovisningskonsult, revisor eller jurist.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFilformat och leverans\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e XLSX, PDF, DOCX och ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSpråk:\u003c\/strong\u003e Engelska och svenska.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAntal filer:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLeverans:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital nedladdning. Ingen fysisk produkt skickas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVanliga frågor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eNär måste en kontrollbalansräkning upprättas?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eGenast när styrelsen har skäl att anta att det egna kapitalet, beräknat enligt lagens regler för kontrollbalansräkning, understiger hälften av det registrerade aktiekapitalet, eller när det särskilda tvingande skälet i lagen är uppfyllt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eÄr en kontrollbalansräkning ett insolvenstest?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNej. Kapitalbrist och insolvens är olika juridiska frågor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMåste en revisor granska den?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOm bolaget har en revisor granskar denne kontrollbalansräkningen. Arbetsboken kan även användas av bolag utan revisor, men bolagets faktiska revisorsstatus måste verifieras.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBehöver hälften av aktiekapitalet återställas inom åtta månader?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNej. Om processen fortsätter till en andra kontrollstämma är den relevanta återställningsnivån det \u003cstrong\u003efulla registrerade aktiekapitalet\u003c\/strong\u003e, inte bara hälften.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKan K2 och K3 blandas?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNej. BFN:s vägledning anger att ramverken inte bör blandas i samma kontrollbalansräkning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eDetta paket är ett beräknings- och dokumentationsstöd enligt svensk rätt och ersätter inte individuell rådgivning gällande redovisning, revision eller juridik.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48168039350614,"sku":"7350139912709","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/control-balance-sheet-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791247302"},{"product_id":"korjournal-mall-gratis-word-excel-pdf","title":"Mileage log – Excel\/Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVehicle Logbook – complete template package for Swedish tax and vehicle documentation\u003c\/strong\u003e including Swedish Excel, Word, and PDF templates, an English language version, and detailed user guides. The package is designed based on the information recommended by the Swedish Tax Agency (Skatteverket) for a vehicle logbook and is suitable for companies, employers, drivers, and private individuals who need to distinguish between business and private driving.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTax reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Swedish Tax Agency's current guidance on vehicle logbooks, company car benefits, business travel, and tax-free car allowances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish vehicle logbook – Excel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eAutomatic trip length, business\/private, mileage allowance, control totals, and annual overview.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish vehicle logbook – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly manual vehicle logbook.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVehicle Logbook – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish Excel, Word, and PDF version compliant with Swedish tax rules.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish + English user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eDesigned according to the Swedish Tax Agency's recommended information\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency recommends, among other things, that a vehicle logbook should contain the odometer reading at the beginning and end of the year, registration number, current year, date and odometer reading at the start and end of each trip, kilometers driven, start and end address, business\/purpose, and which locations, companies, or contact persons were visited during business trips. Notes on the driver and refueling may also be relevant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNew automatic Excel model\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Excel version is significantly more advanced than the previous template and includes:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSTART\u003c\/strong\u003e – registration number, year, vehicle model, odometer reading, and vehicle category.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVEHICLE LOGBOOK\u003c\/strong\u003e – 500 trip rows with automatic trip length calculation and breakdown between business and private.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSUMMARY\u003c\/strong\u003e – business kilometers, private kilometers, miles (mil), calculated car allowance, and reconciliation against odometer readings.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efields for road\/bridge\/ferry tolls, parking, fuel\/charging, and notes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003etracking of private usage occasions and private mileage,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eindicator for 30,000 km of business driving.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMinor private use of employer-provided car\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor private use of an employer-provided car to fall within the limit of \"minor extent,\" \u003cstrong\u003eboth\u003c\/strong\u003e of the following conditions must be met during the calendar year:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea maximum of 10 private usage occasions, and\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea maximum of 100 Swedish miles (1,000 km) of private driving.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTravel between home and the regular place of work is generally counted as private travel. Therefore, the Excel template includes a separate field for private kilometers and a sequence number field for private usage occasions as a practical control tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003e3,000 Swedish miles (30,000 km) in business\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf an employee drives at least 3,000 Swedish miles (30,000 km) for business purposes during an income year with their company car, the employer may, under certain conditions, reduce the taxable benefit value by 25 percent. The vehicle logbook is an essential piece of documentation to prove the extent of business driving. The Excel template therefore displays a special indicator when 30,000 business kilometers are reached.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTax-free car allowance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor the 2026 income year, the Swedish Tax Agency's flat rates are:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eprivate car:\u003c\/strong\u003e 25 SEK per mil (10 km),\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ecompany car not fully electric:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12 SEK per mil (10 km),\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003efully electric company car:\u003c\/strong\u003e 9.50 SEK per mil (10 km).\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Excel template converts kilometers to \"mil\" and uses the selected vehicle category. The amounts are included as a control\/calculation aid and should be updated when the Swedish Tax Agency changes the flat rates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eParking, congestion tax, and other fees\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eParking is not automatically included in the standard mileage allowance. Road, bridge, and ferry tolls, as well as congestion taxes, may also have separate tax treatments. Therefore, the new logbook has specific columns for such costs instead of mixing them with the kilometer allowance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFuel benefit\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the employer pays for fuel for a company car, the vehicle logbook is particularly important for allocating private and business-related driving. If sufficient documentation is lacking, the tax consequences can be significantly worse. Therefore, the template also includes optional fields for refueling or charging.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWord and PDF for manual use\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor those who do not want to keep a logbook directly in Excel, a clean, print-friendly Word\/PDF version is included, featuring vehicle details, odometer readings, and trip rows. This can be used on paper and subsequently compiled in Excel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version for use under Swedish tax rules\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is intended for Swedish companies and drivers who work in English and is not a foreign tax logbook.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/vehicle-logbook-template-english\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you need an English-first product page? See Vehicle Logbook Template →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eImportant to know\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA vehicle logbook is a form of documentation and evidence. It does not automatically guarantee specific tax exemptions, deduction rights, or benefit treatments. The assessment is affected by, among other things, the actual purpose of the trip, the employee's regular place of work, the type of vehicle used, and who paid for fuel and other expenses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e XLSX, DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 10.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product will be sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a vehicle logbook have to be electronic?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Swedish Tax Agency states that a vehicle logbook can be kept on paper, on a computer, or electronically. The important thing is that the documentation is sufficiently detailed and reliable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it enough to just write down the number of kilometers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as strong evidence. The Swedish Tax Agency recommends significantly more information, including date, odometer reading, addresses, purpose, and visited locations or companies for business trips.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs travel between home and work considered a business trip?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNormally not. Travel between home and the regular place of work is counted as private travel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the Excel template calculate mileage allowance?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It calculates a control amount based on business kilometers and the selected vehicle category using the included 2026 flat rates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the same template for a company car and a private car?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but the tax assessment differs between a private car and a company car. Therefore, choose the correct vehicle category and use the guide to understand the difference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation and calculation aid and does not replace individual tax, payroll, or accounting advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48168312078678,"sku":"7350139912716","price":29.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/korjournal-produktbild-2027.png?v=1791248033"},{"product_id":"vehicle-logbook-template-english","title":"Fordonets körjournal – engelsk XLSX\/DOCX\/PDF + svensk referens + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eVehicle Logbook – English-first template package under Swedish tax rules\u003c\/strong\u003e for companies, employees and individuals who need a structured way to document business and private vehicle use. The package includes an automated English Excel workbook, English Word\/PDF versions, a Swedish reference set and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTax and documentation review: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against current Swedish Tax Agency guidance on vehicle logbooks, car benefits, business travel and the 2026 mileage-allowance rates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Vehicle Logbook – Excel\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eAutomated workbook with trip calculations, business\/private split and annual summary.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Vehicle Logbook – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrintable manual versions for paper or digital completion.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance on Swedish tax documentation and mileage rules.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference set – XLSX\/DOCX\/PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eMatching Swedish reference versions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish-language guidance corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA vehicle logbook is evidence – not an automatic tax guarantee\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA logbook helps document how a vehicle has actually been used. Swedish tax treatment depends on the facts, including whether the trip was genuinely made for work, what the regular place of work is, who paid the fuel and how the vehicle was provided. The template is therefore designed as structured evidence and review support rather than a promise of a particular tax outcome.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInformation the workbook records\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edate and driver,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebusiness or private classification,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebusiness purpose \/ errand,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecustomer, company, place or contact visited,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003estart and end address,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eodometer at start and end,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eautomatically calculated trip distance,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebusiness and private kilometres,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eroad, bridge and ferry costs,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eparking,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efuel or charging quantity and cost,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eprivate-use occasion number,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003enotes and supporting context.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAutomated Excel calculations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Excel workbook contains dedicated \u003cstrong\u003eSTART\u003c\/strong\u003e, \u003cstrong\u003eLOGBOOK\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003eSUMMARY\u003c\/strong\u003e sheets. It automatically calculates trip distance from odometer readings, separates business and private kilometres and summarises the annual totals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe annual summary also compares the logged trips with the vehicle's opening and closing odometer readings so that unexplained differences can be identified and investigated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBusiness travel and private travel\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTrips genuinely made in the course of work are recorded as business trips. Travel between home and the regular place of work is normally treated as private travel. The workbook therefore keeps business and private kilometres separate rather than treating every work-related day as business mileage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLimited private use of an employer-provided car\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhere the question is whether private use remains within the Swedish limited-use threshold, \u003cstrong\u003eboth conditions\u003c\/strong\u003e must be met: no more than 10 private-use occasions and no more than 100 Swedish mil (1,000 km) of private driving during the calendar year. The workbook includes separate fields and summary indicators for both measures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExtensive business driving\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe summary also contains an indicator for 3,000 Swedish mil (30,000 km) of business driving during the income year, since extensive business use of a benefit car can affect the taxable car-benefit value when the legal conditions are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003e2026 mileage rates built into the workbook\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe workbook currently uses the Swedish Tax Agency's 2026 rates:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eOwn car:\u003c\/strong\u003e SEK 25 per Swedish mil.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eBenefit car that is not fully electric:\u003c\/strong\u003e SEK 12 per Swedish mil.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFully electric benefit car:\u003c\/strong\u003e SEK 9.50 per Swedish mil.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Excel model converts kilometres to Swedish mil and applies the selected vehicle category. These figures are clearly presented as editable year-specific inputs because the rates may change in later years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eParking, road charges and similar costs\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eParking and road, bridge or ferry charges are kept in separate columns. They should not simply be added to the mileage rate because separate tax and reimbursement rules may apply. Congestion tax and employer-paid fuel can also require separate treatment depending on the circumstances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOne English-first package, with Swedish reference\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English workbook and documents are the primary versions in this product. The Swedish versions are included as references for Swedish finance teams, advisers, employees and authorities. This is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language template for Swedish tax documentation\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a UK, US or other foreign-law mileage logbook.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/korjournal-mall-gratis-word-excel-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first package? See the Swedish Körjournal product →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain when a vehicle logbook is useful, which data should be recorded, the distinction between business and private trips, limited private use, extensive business driving, mileage rates, Excel workflow, year-end reconciliation and common documentation mistakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e XLSX, DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 10.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a logbook legally required in every case?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A logbook is primarily important as evidence and documentation. In many car-benefit and business-travel situations it is the clearest way to substantiate how the vehicle has actually been used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre trips between home and the regular workplace business trips?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNormally no. They are generally treated as private travel for car-benefit and mileage documentation purposes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the 10-occasion and 100-mil limits?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThey are the two cumulative thresholds relevant to limited private use of an employer-provided car. Both must be satisfied.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Excel file calculate mileage automatically?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It calculates each trip from the start and end odometer readings and provides business\/private totals and an annual reconciliation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the mileage rates change?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The rates in the workbook are the Swedish values for income year 2026 and should be checked for later years.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a documentation and calculation aid for Swedish tax use and does not replace individual tax, payroll or accounting advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48168733344086,"sku":"7350139912723","price":29.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/vehicle-logbook-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791248707"},{"product_id":"fullmakt-att-foretrada-aktiebolag-mall","title":"Power of attorney to represent a limited company – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePower of Attorney to represent a limited company\u003c\/strong\u003e – a complete template package under Swedish law for companies wishing to grant an individual the right to represent the company in clearly defined business, regulatory, banking, or contractual matters. The package includes Swedish and English Word\/PDF templates as well as detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe review covers the Swedish Companies Act's regulations on the board of directors, the CEO, and authorized signatories, as well as the power of attorney regulations under the Contracts Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish Power of Attorney – Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable master template for Swedish limited companies.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish Power of Attorney – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-friendly version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePower of Attorney – English\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish language version in Word + PDF under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance in Word + PDF.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA power of attorney is not the same as registered signatory authority\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe board of directors represents the company and signs for it in accordance with the Companies Act. The CEO may represent the company within the scope of day-to-day management, and the board may appoint a special authorized signatory. This product is instead a \u003cstrong\u003estandard contractual power of attorney\u003c\/strong\u003e for defined tasks. It does not automatically register the proxy holder as a special authorized signatory with the Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eRegistered signatory authority and a standard power of attorney follow different rules. For registered signatory authority, a provision stating that two or more persons must sign jointly can be registered, whereas other limitations – such as internal monetary limits – are not registered as limitations on the right to sign. If a monetary limit or other restriction is intended to define the agent's external authority, it should therefore be clearly stated in the power of attorney itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho should sign on behalf of the company?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney must be signed by the person or persons who have the right to bind the company in the situation in question. Therefore, the template contains specific fields for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eregistered signatory authority,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eboard resolutions,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCEO authority within day-to-day management,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother documented basis for authority.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company is signed for by two or more persons jointly, the power of attorney must be signed in the corresponding authorized manner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the template can cover\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYou can select and specify, among other things:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003enegotiation, execution, amendment, and termination of agreements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eorders and purchases with monetary limits,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtacts with authorities and public bodies,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecustomer and supplier receivables, payment plans, and disputes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebanking and payment matters where the bank accepts the power of attorney,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereal estate, premises, or tenant-owner apartment matters,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edisputes and agent management when a separate litigation power of attorney is not required,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother specifically stated assignments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMonetary limits and internal restrictions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes separate fields for monetary limit per legal act, total financial framework, requirement for countersignature, geographical\/operational scope, and other restrictions. Important limitations should appear directly in the power of attorney shown to third parties, not only in internal instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBoard resolutions and the responsibility of corporate bodies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA power of attorney does not transfer the board's statutory responsibility to the proxy holder. If the underlying business requires a board or general meeting resolution, that decision must still be made. The package therefore includes a \u003cstrong\u003evoluntary annex for documentation of board resolutions\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBanks and authorities may require their own forms\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA recipient may set their own formatting and identification requirements. For example, banks may require the bank's own power of attorney form or additional authority verification. The power of attorney does not grant the proxy holder the right to use anyone else's personal BankID, PIN code, security token, or similar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReal property – special requirement for writing\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the power of attorney is to be used for agreements regarding the purchase, exchange, or gift of real property, the authority must be in writing according to Section 27 of the Contracts Act. The template therefore contains specific fields for property designation, legal act, price range, and other terms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSubstitution and conflicts of interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYou can explicitly prohibit sub-delegation or allow it only for a specific assignment. The template also contains a specific limitation for agreements where the proxy holder themselves, a related party, or a related company has a conflicting economic interest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eValidity and revocation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney can be valid until further notice, for a specific period, or only for a specific assignment. The guide explains how written powers of attorney should be recovered or destroyed upon revocation and when third parties should be notified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSwedish + English in the same package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is suitable for Swedish companies working with international counterparties or using English as their corporate or working language.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/generalfullmakt-mall-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you need a general power of attorney for an individual\/company? See General Power of Attorney →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guide included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guide covers the difference between a standard power of attorney and signatory authority, who should sign, authority and capacity, board resolutions, bank\/authority requirements, real estate power of attorney, revocation, and a complete checklist before signing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish and English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the proxy holder become a registered authorized signatory?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A standard power of attorney does not automatically register the proxy holder as a special authorized signatory with the Swedish Companies Registration Office.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the CEO sign the power of attorney?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the assignment. The CEO has the statutory right to represent the company within day-to-day management, but larger or unusual measures may require a board resolution or other authorized signature.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the power of attorney be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a general rule for a standard company power of attorney. However, the recipient may set their own formal requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the proxy holder buy or sell real estate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis can be covered if the authority is clearly and explicitly stated in writing and the company's internal decisions have been properly made. Real estate matters may also require additional documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal advice. Major transactions, real estate deals, financing, corporate acquisitions, international agreements, or questions regarding the authority of corporate bodies should be reviewed separately.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48169315729750,"sku":"7350139912730","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/fullmakt-aktiebolag-hero-2027.png?v=1791252728"},{"product_id":"fullmakt-att-foretrada-bolag-mall-engelska","title":"Power of Attorney to Represent a Company (English) – Swedish Law","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePower of Attorney for a Swedish Limited Company\u003c\/strong\u003e – an English-first template package governed by Swedish law for companies that need to authorise a person to represent the company in clearly defined business, contractual, banking, authority or property matters. The package includes an English Word\/PDF template, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against the Swedish Companies Act rules on board representation, the managing director and special signatories, together with the Swedish Contracts Act rules on powers of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePower of Attorney – English Word\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable primary template for a Swedish limited company.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePower of Attorney – English PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance on authority, company signatory rules, board resolutions and revocation.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference template – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for boards, counterparties and advisers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – Word + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish guidance corresponding to the English package.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eA power of attorney is not the same as registered company signatory authority\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder the Swedish Companies Act, the board represents the company and signs for it. The managing director may represent the company within the scope of day-to-day management, and the board may appoint one or more special signatories. This product is instead an \u003cstrong\u003eordinary contractual power of attorney\u003c\/strong\u003e for defined assignments. It does not automatically register the attorney as a special signatory with the Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho should sign for the company?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe power of attorney must be issued by the person or persons who are authorised to bind the company in the relevant matter. The template therefore contains dedicated fields for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eregistered company-signatory authority,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea board resolution,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe managing director's authority within day-to-day management,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eanother documented basis of authority.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company's registered signatory rule requires two or more persons acting jointly, the power of attorney should be signed accordingly. The Swedish Companies Registration Office also states that powers of attorney submitted to it are generally signed by the company's authorised signatories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat can the template cover?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe authority can be selected and tailored for matters such as:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003enegotiating, entering into, changing and terminating contracts,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eorders and purchases subject to monetary limits,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003econtacts with Swedish authorities and public bodies,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecustomer and supplier claims, payment plans and invoice disputes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebanking and payment matters where the bank accepts the power of attorney,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ereal-estate, premises or tenant-owned apartment matters,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edisputes and representative matters where a separate procedural authority is not required,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eother specifically identified assignments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMonetary limits and restrictions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains separate fields for a maximum amount per transaction, total authority cap, co-signing requirement, geographic\/business scope and other limitations. Important restrictions should be stated directly in the instrument shown to the counterparty and not only in internal instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBoard decisions and corporate responsibility\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA power of attorney does not transfer the board's statutory responsibilities to the attorney. If the underlying transaction requires a board or shareholders' meeting decision, that corporate decision must still be taken. The package therefore contains an \u003cstrong\u003eoptional appendix for documenting the relevant board resolution\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBanks and authorities may require their own forms\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA receiving organisation can impose its own identity and form requirements. A bank may require its own power-of-attorney form or additional authority checks. The instrument does not authorise the attorney to use another person's personal BankID, PIN, security token or other personal authentication credentials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReal property – written authority required\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder section 27 of the Swedish Contracts Act, authority to enter into an agreement for the purchase, exchange or gift of real property must be in writing. The template therefore includes dedicated fields for the property, type of transaction, price limits and other conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSubstitution and conflicts of interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe company can prohibit the attorney from appointing a substitute or permit substitution only for a specified assignment. The template also contains a restriction for transactions where the attorney, a related person or a related company has a conflicting financial interest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eValidity and revocation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe authority may apply indefinitely, for a specified period or only for a defined assignment. The guides explain the Swedish Contracts Act revocation framework, including why a written instrument held by the attorney should normally be recovered or destroyed when revoked and why relevant counterparties may need to be notified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWitnesses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general statutory requirement that an ordinary company power of attorney be witnessed. The receiving bank, authority or other counterparty may nevertheless impose its own requirements. Optional witness fields can therefore be used when appropriate without presenting witnessing as universally required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish + Swedish in one package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary version in this product. The Swedish document is included as a reference for Swedish boards, counterparties, banks and advisers. This is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a UK, US or other foreign-law corporate power of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/fullmakt-att-foretrada-aktiebolag-mall\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer a Swedish-first product? See Fullmakt att företräda aktiebolag →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDetailed user guides included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe guides explain the difference between an ordinary power of attorney and registered signatory authority, who should sign, authority versus internal instructions, board approvals, banking and authority requirements, real-property powers, revocation and a practical pre-signing checklist.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English and Swedish.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the attorney become a registered company signatory?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. An ordinary power of attorney does not automatically register the attorney as a special signatory with the Swedish Companies Registration Office.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the managing director issue the power of attorney?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the assignment. A managing director has statutory authority within day-to-day management, while major or unusual transactions may require a board decision or another authorised signatory.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the power of attorney be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a general rule for an ordinary company power of attorney. The receiving organisation may impose its own requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the attorney buy or sell real property for the company?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat can be authorised where the power is stated clearly and in writing and the company's internal corporate approvals are in place. Additional property-registration documents may also be required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. Major transactions, financing, property deals, company acquisitions, international arrangements or uncertainty about corporate authority should be reviewed separately.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48169425273174,"sku":"7350139912747","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/power-of-attorney-company-english-product-image-2027.png?v=1791251499"},{"product_id":"bostadshyresavtal-mall-word-pdf","title":"Residential Lease Agreement Template – Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eResidential lease agreement under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an updated document package for residential leasing. The package includes a main Swedish template in Word\/PDF, an English reference version governed by Swedish law, and detailed user guides in Swedish and English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe package is updated with the new Private Rental Act (2026:772), which entered into force on July 1, 2026, as well as current rules in Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eResidential lease agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable main Swedish template.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eResidential lease agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready Swedish version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains choice of law, rent, termination, permits, deposits, and security of tenure.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish reference version governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance on the same Swedish regulatory framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant from July 1, 2026: two different frameworks\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe previous product version was primarily based on Chapter 12 of the Land Code. Since July 1, 2026, there is a new \u003cstrong\u003ePrivate Rental Act (2026:772)\u003c\/strong\u003e for certain rentals of one's own home. Which framework applies affects, among other things, rent setting, termination, security of tenure, and when the agreement can be terminated prematurely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore contains a specific choice-of-law section that must be completed before the agreement is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen does Chapter 12 of the Land Code apply?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChapter 12 of the Land Code – often called the Tenancy Act – is still the central regulatory framework for many residential tenancy relationships. It applies, for example, to standard primary leasing, subleasing of a rental apartment, and situations where the Private Rental Act is not applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe rules are largely mandatory for the tenant's benefit. A contractual term may therefore be void even if both parties have signed it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen can the Private Rental Act (2026:772) apply?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new law generally applies when a natural person or an estate grants, for compensation, a house or part of a house that is to be used wholly or to a not insignificant extent as a dwelling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eHowever, the law does not apply when, among other things, the landlord holds the home under a rental contract, for holiday rentals, or when the landlord regularly rents out more than two apartments that do not constitute part of their own home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older Act (2012:978) on the Rental of Private Homes was repealed on July 1, 2026, but still applies to agreements concluded under that act before its entry into force.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRent – different rules depending on the form of rental\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eStandard subleasing according to Chapter 12 of the Land Code\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor subleasing, there are specific rules regarding reasonable rent. For a rental apartment, the rent may normally not exceed the primary rent plus permitted surcharges. Surcharges for furniture and other equipment may, according to current rules, not exceed 15 percent of the rent the landlord pays themselves, and surcharges for other utilities may not exceed actual costs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePrivate Rental Act from July 1, 2026\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor new agreements covered by the Private Rental Act (2026:772), the rent must be agreed upon as a specific amount. Separate charges for, for example, electricity, hot water, and water can be agreed upon based on actual consumption costs. Upon request, the Rent Tribunal may review the rent and lower it when the conditions of the law are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older cost-based model according to the 2012 Private Rental Act should therefore not be used routinely for new agreements after July 1, 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLease period and termination\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template has separate options for open-ended and fixed-term agreements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrivate Rental Act:\u003c\/strong\u003e a fixed-term agreement normally ends at the end of the rental period. The tenant may always terminate the agreement to the turn of a month occurring at least three months after the notice. For open-ended agreements, the law also provides for three months' notice to the turn of a month.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eChapter 12 of the Land Code:\u003c\/strong\u003e the main rule for residential rent is also three months' notice to the turn of a month for open-ended agreements, but the rules for fixed-term agreements and different situations must be assessed according to the Tenancy Act.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity of tenure\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSecurity of tenure differs between the frameworks. Agreements covered by the new Private Rental Act do not have the same security of tenure as residential leases under Chapter 12 of the Land Code. In standard subleasing, however, security of tenure may arise, normally after more than two years in succession. A waiver of security of tenure should be handled with the correct separate document and, when the rules require it, be reviewed by the Rent Tribunal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePermit for subleasing\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the person sub-letting holds the property under a rental contract, the landlord's consent or permission from the Rent Tribunal is normally required for subleasing. For cooperative apartments (bostadsrätt), the consent of the cooperative housing association or permission from the Rent Tribunal is normally required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the agreement is signed before the permit is in place, it should be made explicitly conditional upon the necessary permit being obtained. The template contains such an option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLate rent payment – different time limits\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor residential leases under Chapter 12 of the Land Code, payment delays of more than one week after the due date can constitute grounds for forfeiture. According to the Private Rental Act (2026:772), a delay of more than two weeks is instead stated as grounds for the landlord's right to terminate the agreement prematurely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis does not mean that eviction happens automatically when the time limit is exceeded. Rules regarding notifications, correction, recovery, and procedure must be considered where they are applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDeposit\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains a clear deposit section for amount, payment date, what the deposit may be used for, and how the refund is to be handled. A deposit should not be described as an extra fee or automatically fall to the landlord at the end of the agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInspection, inventory, and condition\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe document has space for move-in inspection, inventory list, number of keys, and documented defects. Photo and attachment documentation is recommended as it can reduce the risk of later disputes regarding damages and normal wear and tear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTenant's duty of care and damages\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement distinguishes between normal wear and tear and damages for which the tenant is responsible. The landlord's statutory obligations cannot generally be transferred to the tenant via a standard clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLandlord's access\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe landlord does not have an unlimited right to enter the home. The template refers to the legal situations where access may be required, for example, supervision or necessary work, and does not contain any general \"free access\" clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePets, smoking, and house rules\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere are optional fields for pets, smoking, and specific house rules. Such terms must still be compatible with mandatory law, association rules, and the circumstances of the individual tenancy relationship.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInsurance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template provides the option to specify requirements for home insurance and liability for various insurance policies. The parties should check with their insurance companies that the rental is covered by the correct insurance protection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language reference governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is not a British or American lease agreement. The Swedish version is the master version in this product package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/bostadshyresavtal-mall-engelska-residential-lease-agreement-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWould you like the English version as the main product? See Residential Lease Agreement – Swedish Law →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen individual advice is particularly appropriate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSeek individual advice in cases of uncertainty regarding which framework applies, very long-term leases, multiple rented properties, block leasing, corporate leasing, disputes about reasonable rent, waiver of security of tenure, forfeiture\/eviction, or more complex ownership and usufruct relationships.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish main version + English reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 17 pages in the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Private Rental Act always apply when a private individual rents out property?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The scope of the act has several limitations. For example, renting out a home that the landlord themselves holds under a rental contract falls outside the scope of the act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I set any rent I want?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Tenancy rules differ between the frameworks, and the rent can be subject to review.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need a permit to sublet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOften yes. Rental contracts and cooperative apartments have different permit rules. Check that the correct consent or permit is in place before the rental begins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the subtenant have security of tenure?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on which framework applies and how long the tenancy has lasted. Therefore, security of tenure should not be handled with a general standard wording.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the template guarantee that the agreement is valid in every situation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The template is a general documentation support. Applicable law, mandatory rules, permits, and the actual circumstances must be correct in the individual case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation support under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. The agreement must be adapted to the correct form of rental and the parties' actual circumstances.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48178621874518,"sku":"7350139912792","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/bostadshyresavtal-hero-2027.png?v=1791257609"},{"product_id":"bostadshyresavtal-mall-engelska-residential-lease-agreement-word-pdf","title":"Residential Lease Agreement – Swedish Law | English Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eResidential Lease Agreement governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an English-first document package for residential letting in Sweden. The package includes an editable English Word\/PDF agreement, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eUpdated for the new Swedish Private Letting Act (Privatuthyrningslag 2026:772), in force since 1 July 2026, and for current Chapter 12 Land Code rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eResidential Lease Agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable English primary template governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eResidential Lease Agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready English version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains legal regime, rent, notice, consent, deposit and security of tenure.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference agreement – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for landlords, tenants, advisers and authorities.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eCorresponding Swedish-language guidance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant from 1 July 2026: two separate Swedish regimes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older version of this product mainly referred to Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code. Since 1 July 2026, Sweden also has a new \u003cstrong\u003ePrivate Letting Act (Privatuthyrningslag 2026:772)\u003c\/strong\u003e for certain residential lettings by natural persons and estates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe applicable regime affects rent, notice, security of tenure and early termination. The template therefore begins with a dedicated legal-regime selection block.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen does Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code apply?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChapter 12 of the Land Code – often called the Swedish Tenancy Act or \u003cem\u003ehyreslagen\u003c\/em\u003e – remains the principal framework for many residential tenancies. Typical examples include first-hand residential letting, subletting of a tenancy and arrangements that fall outside the Private Letting Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMany provisions are mandatory in favour of the tenant. A contractual clause can therefore be ineffective even if both parties have signed it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen can the Private Letting Act (2026:772) apply?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new Act generally applies where a natural person or an estate lets a house or part of a house for residential use against payment, subject to the statutory exclusions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt does not apply, among other situations, where the landlord holds the dwelling under a tenancy, where the letting is for holiday purposes, or where the landlord regularly lets more than two dwellings that are not part of the landlord's own home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe former 2012 Act on private letting was repealed on 1 July 2026 but continues to govern agreements entered into under that Act before the new legislation took effect.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRent – the correct rule depends on the letting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSubletting under Chapter 12\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor a sublet tenancy, rent is generally limited by the rent paid by the primary tenant plus permitted additions. For furniture and equipment, the permitted addition may not exceed 15% of the primary rent, while charges for other included utilities may not exceed the landlord's actual cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePrivate Letting Act from 1 July 2026\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor agreements governed by the new Private Letting Act, rent is agreed as a fixed amount. Separate charges for items such as electricity, hot water or water can be based on actual consumption costs. The Swedish Rent Tribunal may review and reduce the rent where the statutory conditions are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe former cost-based formula under the repealed 2012 Act should therefore not automatically be used for new agreements entered after 1 July 2026.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTerm and notice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template has separate options for indefinite and fixed-term leases.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrivate Letting Act:\u003c\/strong\u003e a fixed-term agreement normally ends at the agreed end date. A tenant may always give notice to a month-end occurring at the earliest three months after notice. For indefinite agreements, the statutory framework also uses a three-month notice period to month-end.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eChapter 12 Land Code:\u003c\/strong\u003e the main rule for an indefinite residential tenancy is also three months to a month-end, while fixed-term agreements are subject to the Land Code's specific rules.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity of tenure\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSecurity of tenure differs between the regimes. Agreements governed by the new Private Letting Act do not provide the same security of tenure as ordinary residential tenancy under Chapter 12. In ordinary subletting, security of tenure may arise, commonly after more than two consecutive years. Any waiver should be handled using the correct separate procedure and, where required, with the Rent Tribunal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConsent and permission for subletting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the person letting the dwelling is a tenant, subletting normally requires the primary landlord's consent or permission from the Rent Tribunal. For a condominium, the owner normally needs the condominium association's consent or permission from the Rent Tribunal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the lease is signed before approval has been obtained, the agreement should clearly state that it is conditional upon the required consent or permission. The template includes this option.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLate payment – different statutory thresholds\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder Chapter 12 of the Land Code, residential rent that remains unpaid for more than one week after the due date may constitute a ground for forfeiture. Under the Private Letting Act, more than two weeks' delay is identified as a ground for the landlord to terminate the agreement early.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis does not mean that eviction follows automatically. Statutory notice, cure, reinstatement and procedural rules may still have to be followed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDeposit\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement includes a structured deposit section for amount, payment date, permitted deductions and repayment. A deposit should not be treated as an automatic additional fee or automatically retained at the end of the tenancy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCondition report, inventory and evidence\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes fields for move-in inspection, inventory, keys, meter readings and known defects. Photo documentation and signed attachments are recommended to reduce later disputes about damage and normal wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTenant care obligations and damage\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement distinguishes ordinary wear from damage for which the tenant may be responsible. Statutory landlord duties cannot simply be transferred to the tenant through a generic clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLandlord access\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe landlord does not have unrestricted access to the dwelling. The template refers only to circumstances in which access is permitted under Swedish law and the agreement, for example necessary inspection or urgent work.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOccupants, pets, smoking and house rules\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOptional fields are included for occupants, pets, smoking and additional house rules. Such terms still need to comply with mandatory law, condominium or property rules and the circumstances of the particular tenancy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInsurance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement allows the parties to record insurance responsibilities and whether the tenant should maintain home insurance. Both parties should confirm that their insurance actually covers the relevant letting arrangement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish primary – Swedish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English agreement is the primary version in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference. Both versions are structured around Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThis is not a UK or US residential lease.\u003c\/strong\u003e English terminology is used to make the document easier to work with internationally, but the legal framework is Swedish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/bostadshyresavtal-mall-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer the Swedish-first product? See Bostadshyresavtal – Word\/PDF + English + användarguide →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen individual advice is particularly appropriate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIndividual legal review is recommended if the applicable regime is uncertain, for long-term letting, multiple rented dwellings, block letting, corporate landlords or tenants, a dispute about rent, waiver of security of tenure, forfeiture\/eviction, or more complex ownership and occupancy arrangements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English primary version + Swedish reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal pages:\u003c\/strong\u003e 22 across the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the Private Letting Act always apply when a private person lets a home?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The Act has several statutory exclusions. For example, it does not apply when the landlord themselves holds the dwelling under a tenancy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the landlord charge any rent they want?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The applicable rent rules depend on the legal regime, and rent may be subject to review.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs permission required for subletting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOften yes. Tenancies and condominiums have different consent rules. Check that the correct approval has been obtained before the letting begins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a subtenant have security of tenure?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThat depends on which statutory regime applies and how long the tenancy has continued. Security of tenure should therefore not be handled with a generic waiver clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the template guarantee that every lease will be valid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The package is a general documentation aid. The correct legal regime, mandatory rules, required permissions and the actual circumstances of the letting must be assessed in each case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid governed by Swedish law and does not replace individual legal advice. The agreement must be adapted to the correct type of letting and the parties' actual circumstances.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48178723389782,"sku":"7350139912808","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/residential-lease-swedish-law-hero-2027.png?v=1791265584"},{"product_id":"lokalhyresavtal-mall-word-pdf","title":"Commercial lease agreement – Word\/PDF + English + user guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommercial Lease Agreement under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an updated document package for leasing office, retail, warehouse, and other business premises. The package includes a main Swedish template in Word\/PDF, an English reference, and detailed user guides in Swedish and English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe package is reviewed against current regulations in Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code regarding commercial leasing, including lease terms, rent\/index, assignment, subletting, forfeiture, indirect security of tenure, changes to terms, mediation, and compensation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommercial Lease Agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable Swedish main template.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommercial Lease Agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready Swedish version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains lease terms, indexation, VAT, security of tenure, and termination.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish reference version governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance for the same Swedish regulatory framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat counts as business premises?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder the Swedish Land Code, premises are defined as any unit not intended to be used, in whole or to a non-negligible extent, as a residence. This includes, for example, offices, shops, warehouses, workshops, studios, or other business premises.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCommercial leasing differs from residential leasing in several important respects. The template is therefore specially designed for commercial\/business tenancies and should not be used as a residential lease agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLease term and termination\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template provides separate options for open-ended and fixed-term agreements. For premises leased indefinitely, the legal default rule is that the agreement must be terminated to end at the turn of the month occurring closest to nine months after the notice of termination, unless a longer notice period has been agreed upon.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEven fixed-term commercial agreements that have lasted longer than nine months must, as a general rule, be terminated to expire. The parties should therefore carefully fill in the lease term, notice period, and any renewal period.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRent and indexation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe base rent is stated as a fixed amount. For fixed-term commercial agreements lasting at least three years, the parties may use a different basis for calculating rent, such as a correctly drafted index clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore distinguishes between the base rent and an optional index component. The index clause should not be used mechanically in shorter agreements where the statutory requirements for such a basis of calculation are not met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVAT on commercial rent\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a general rule, the leasing of real estate is exempt from VAT. Under certain conditions, the landlord may opt for voluntary tax liability for business premises and charge VAT on the rent. The template therefore includes a separate option for VAT rather than automatically adding VAT to all commercial rents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe parties should verify the current VAT treatment before signing the agreement, especially when the premises are used for mixed or VAT-exempt activities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePermitted use of the premises\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement includes a specific field for the exact permitted business activity. The tenant may not, without further ado, use the premises for a purpose substantially different from the agreed one. In long-term tenancies, the Rent Tribunal may, under certain conditions, permit a change of use, but this does not replace the need for a clear contract clause from the start.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMaintenance, installations, and restoration\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template distinguishes between the landlord's and the tenant's responsibility for, for example, surface finishes, installations, maintenance, repairs, and regulatory requirements. For business premises, a clear allocation of responsibility is particularly important.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChanges, installations, signage, and other alterations should require written approval where relevant. The agreement also contains a separate section regarding restoration upon the end of the tenancy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFire safety and regulatory requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe document includes a specific section on systematic fire protection work and responsibility for the regulatory requirements resulting from the agreed business activity. The allocation of responsibility should be adapted to the specific premises and operations rather than being assumed to be identical in every commercial lease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAssignment and subletting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe tenant may not freely assign the lease or sublet the premises. The rules differ between various situations, including when a business is assigned together with the premises. The agreement therefore requires necessary consent or permission and avoids general wording that could give a misleading impression of free assignment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLate rent payment and forfeiture\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor commercial premises, a delay in rent payment of more than two working days after the due date may constitute grounds for forfeiture under Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code. This does not mean that eviction happens automatically. Statutory notifications, rules regarding rectification and \"recovery,\" and proper procedures may still need to be followed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn certain situations, the commercial tenant can recover the leasehold by paying within two weeks of the prescribed notification.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eIndirect security of tenure – important after nine months\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA commercial tenant does not normally have the right to force an extension in the same way as a residential tenant. Instead, \u003cstrong\u003eindirect security of tenure\u003c\/strong\u003e may arise once the tenancy has lasted longer than nine months.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAmong other things, this may grant a right to financial compensation if the landlord refuses to extend the lease or demands unreasonable terms and no statutory exemption applies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA waiver of indirect security of tenure should not be hidden in the lease agreement itself. It must be made in a \u003cstrong\u003eseparate document\u003c\/strong\u003e, and approval from the Rent Tribunal is required in many situations. Therefore, the package refers to the correct separate HN3\/HN5 procedure rather than including a simplified waiver clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompensation in case of wrongful termination\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen a commercial tenant is entitled to compensation under the rules of indirect security of tenure, the statutory minimum is an amount equivalent to one year's rent according to the terminated agreement. In addition, further reasonable compensation for economic loss may apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMarket rent\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn a dispute over extension terms, the market rent of the premises is assessed, primarily based on rents for comparable premises in the area. An index clause or previous rent therefore does not guarantee that a future term will always be considered reasonable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTermination for moving out or changing terms\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCommercial leasing has strict rules regarding termination. If the landlord terminates the agreement, the notice must, in relevant cases, state the terms required for an extension or why an extension is being refused, and inform the tenant that they must refer the dispute to the Rent Tribunal within two months to protect their rights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEven a commercial tenant terminating an agreement for a change in terms must phrase the notice correctly and may need to apply for mediation within two months. A procedural error can have significant consequences.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity, deposit, and guarantee\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains separate options for a deposit, bank guarantee, and other security. The amount, validity period, what the security may be used for, and the conditions for its return should be expressly stated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInsurance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe parties can specify requirements for business, property, and liability insurance, as well as who is responsible for the building's insurance. Insurance requirements should be adapted to the operations actually conducted in the premises.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version is an \u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language reference governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is not a British or American commercial lease agreement. The Swedish version is the main version in this product package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/lokalhyresavtal-mall-engelska-commercial-lease-agreement\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWould you like the English version as the main product? See Commercial Lease Agreement – Swedish Law →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen individual advice is especially appropriate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIndividual legal or tax advice is particularly appropriate for long-term or financially significant tenancies, major adaptation investments, complicated index clauses, turnover-based rent, voluntary VAT, waivers of security of tenure, business transfers, environmental or regulatory requirements, forfeiture, termination, or changes to terms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish main version + English reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 13 pages in the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a commercial tenant have security of tenure?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, after more than nine months, the commercial tenant can normally obtain indirect security of tenure. This protection primarily means a possibility for compensation and mediation, not a general right to always have the agreement extended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan security of tenure be waived directly in the lease agreement?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA waiver must be made in a separate document. Rent Tribunal approval is often required, although there are specific situations where the law allows for a waiver without approval.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the rent be indexed every year?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA basis other than a fixed rent amount can be used under the statutory conditions, including for fixed-term commercial agreements of at least three years. The clause must be correctly drafted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eShould VAT always be added to commercial rent?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Leasing of real estate is normally VAT-exempt, but voluntary tax liability can be used if the conditions are met.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the template guarantee that all commercial tenancies will be legally correct?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The package is a general documentation aid. The use of the premises, the result of negotiations, mandatory regulations, tax\/VAT, and the actual circumstances must be assessed in each individual case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal or tax advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48178825658710,"sku":"7350139912815","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/lokalhyresavtal-hero-2027.png?v=1791266815"},{"product_id":"lokalhyresavtal-mall-engelska-commercial-lease-agreement","title":"Commercial Lease Agreement – Swedish Law | English Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommercial Lease Agreement governed by Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e – an English-first document package for offices, shops, warehouses and other business premises in Sweden. The package includes an editable English Word\/PDF agreement, a Swedish reference version and detailed user guides in both languages.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: 6 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eReviewed against current Chapter 12 Swedish Land Code rules on commercial premises, including term and notice, rent\/indexation, assignment\/subletting, forfeiture, indirect security of tenure, change-of-terms notices, mediation and compensation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommercial Lease Agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable English primary template governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCommercial Lease Agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready English version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eGuidance on notice, CPI\/indexation, VAT, security of tenure and formal termination steps.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference lease – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish reference version for landlords, tenants, advisers and authorities.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eCorresponding Swedish-language guidance.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat counts as commercial premises under Swedish law?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder Chapter 12 of the Swedish Land Code, commercial premises are premises that are not let wholly or to a material extent for residential use. This can include offices, shops, warehouses, workshops, studios and other business premises.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCommercial leases differ materially from residential tenancies. This package is therefore specifically structured for business premises and should not be used as a residential lease agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTerm and notice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes separate choices for indefinite and fixed-term leases. For an indefinite commercial lease, the statutory default notice period is generally nine months to the relevant lease end point unless a longer period has been agreed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA fixed-term lease for commercial premises that has lasted longer than nine consecutive months generally also requires notice in order to end. The lease term, notice period and any renewal cycle should therefore be completed carefully.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRent and CPI\/indexation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBase rent is entered as a fixed amount. For a fixed-term commercial lease with a term of at least three years, the parties may use another calculation basis for the rent, such as a properly drafted CPI\/indexation clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore separates base rent from optional indexation. CPI indexation should not be inserted mechanically in shorter leases where the statutory conditions for an alternative calculation basis are not satisfied.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVAT on commercial rent\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLetting real property is normally exempt from Swedish VAT. Voluntary VAT taxation can, however, be used for qualifying commercial premises when the statutory conditions are met. The agreement therefore contains a separate VAT choice rather than automatically adding VAT to every commercial lease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe parties should verify the actual VAT treatment before signing, especially where the premises are used for mixed, exempt or changing business activities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePermitted use of the premises\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement contains a dedicated field for the permitted business\/use. A tenant may not simply use the premises for a materially different purpose than agreed. In some long-running leases, the Rent Tribunal may permit a change of use where the statutory conditions are met, but this does not remove the need for a clear use clause in the original agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMaintenance, alterations and reinstatement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template separates landlord and tenant responsibilities for surfaces, installations, servicing, repairs and business-specific requirements. Clear allocation is especially important for commercial premises.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAlterations, installations, signage and structural changes can be made subject to written approval. The agreement also includes a separate reinstatement section for the end of the tenancy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFire safety, permits and regulatory compliance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package includes fields for systematic fire-safety allocation and responsibilities arising from the tenant's specific business. The correct allocation depends on the building and the activity carried out in the premises and should therefore be documented rather than assumed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAssignment and subletting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA commercial tenant does not have an unrestricted right to assign the lease or sublet the premises. Swedish law distinguishes between different situations, including transfer of a business together with the lease. The agreement therefore requires the consent or permission that is legally necessary instead of suggesting that transfer or subletting is automatically permitted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLate rent and forfeiture\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor commercial premises, rent remaining unpaid for more than two business days after the due date can constitute a statutory ground for forfeiture under Chapter 12 of the Land Code. This does not mean eviction occurs automatically. Statutory notice, cure, reinstatement and procedural requirements can still apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn qualifying cases, a commercial tenant may reinstate the tenancy by paying within two weeks after the prescribed statutory notice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eIndirect security of tenure after more than nine months\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA commercial tenant generally gains \u003cstrong\u003eindirect security of tenure\u003c\/strong\u003e once the tenancy has lasted longer than nine consecutive months, unless a valid waiver or statutory exception applies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis is not an unconditional right to remain in the premises. Instead, the tenant may have a right to compensation where renewal is refused or unreasonable renewal terms are demanded and no statutory exception applies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the statutory right to compensation applies, the minimum compensation under Chapter 12 section 58 b is an amount corresponding to one annual rent under the terminated lease. Additional reasonable compensation for further financial loss can also be relevant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWaiver of indirect security of tenure\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA waiver should not be hidden inside the main lease. Swedish law requires a separately executed document. Rent Tribunal approval is the main rule where the waiver is entered into before the tenancy has lasted more than nine months, subject to specific statutory exceptions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOfficial HN3\/HN5 procedures should therefore be used where relevant instead of relying on a generic waiver sentence in the main lease.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTermination for vacation or change of terms\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eCommercial lease notices are formally demanding. A landlord terminating for vacation or altered terms must, where the statutory rules apply, specify the renewal terms demanded or the reason renewal is refused and inform the tenant of the two-month deadline for referring the dispute to the Rent Tribunal for mediation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA defective landlord notice can be ineffective. A tenant terminating for a change of terms must likewise state the requested changes and refer the matter to the Rent Tribunal within two months if the parties do not reach agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMarket rent\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn renewal disputes, requested rent is assessed against market rent – the rent the premises can be expected to command on the open market at the end of the lease. Comparable premises in the locality are the primary reference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSecurity, deposit and guarantees\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement includes separate options for a cash deposit, bank guarantee, parent-company guarantee or another agreed security. The amount, duration, permitted use and release conditions should be documented clearly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInsurance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe parties can record requirements for business, property and liability insurance and who is responsible for building insurance. The insurance arrangements should reflect the actual business operated in the premises.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish primary – Swedish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English agreement is the primary version in this product. The Swedish version is included as a reference. Both versions are governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThis is not a UK or US commercial lease template.\u003c\/strong\u003e English terminology is used to make the agreement easier to work with internationally, but the legal framework remains Swedish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/lokalhyresavtal-mall-word-pdf\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePrefer the Swedish-first product? See Lokalhyresavtal – Word\/PDF + English + användarguide →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen individual advice is particularly appropriate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIndividual legal or tax advice is particularly appropriate for long or high-value leases, substantial tenant improvements, turnover rent, complex CPI\/indexation arrangements, voluntary VAT taxation, waiver of security of tenure, business transfers, environmental or regulatory requirements, forfeiture, termination or change-of-terms proceedings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguages:\u003c\/strong\u003e English primary version + Swedish reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal pages:\u003c\/strong\u003e 13 across the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a commercial tenant have security of tenure?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eGenerally yes after more than nine months, but the protection is indirect. It principally concerns compensation, mediation and related rights rather than an unconditional right to remain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan security of tenure be waived inside the main lease?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe waiver must be made in a separately executed document. Rent Tribunal approval is commonly required, subject to statutory exceptions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the rent be indexed every year?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn alternative calculation basis such as CPI indexation can be used when the statutory conditions are met, including for certain fixed-term commercial leases of at least three years. The clause should be drafted carefully.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs VAT always added to commercial rent?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Real-property letting is generally VAT exempt. Voluntary VAT taxation may be used where the statutory requirements are satisfied.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes this template guarantee the outcome of every commercial tenancy?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The package is a general documentation aid. The permitted use, negotiated commercial terms, mandatory law, VAT\/tax treatment and the actual circumstances must be assessed in each case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid governed by Swedish law and does not replace individual legal or tax advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48178888474966,"sku":"7350139912822","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/commercial-lease-swedish-law-hero-2027.png?v=1791268259"},{"product_id":"mall-for-overlatelseavtal-enskild-firma-till-aktiebolag","title":"Transfer Agreement Template – Sole Proprietorship to Swedish Limited Company","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTransfer Agreement for the conversion from sole proprietorship to a limited company (Aktiebolag)\u003c\/strong\u003e – an updated 2026\/2027 package for business asset transfers under Swedish law. The package includes a main Swedish template in Word\/PDF, an English reference, and user guides in Swedish and English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally and tax reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eUpdated with current regulations regarding transfer at under-value, tax allocation reserves, expansion funds, business transfers under the Value Added Tax Act, accounting, and transfer of undertakings for employees.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTransfer Agreement – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable Swedish master template for business asset transfers.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTransfer Agreement – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready Swedish version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains tax, VAT, reserves, liabilities, agreements, staff, and accounting.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eBusiness Transfer Agreement governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance on the same Swedish regulatory framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant: conversion is more than just an agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA sole proprietorship is not a separate legal entity from the individual business owner, whereas a limited company is a separate legal entity. Therefore, assets, liabilities, agreements, permits, personnel, tax registrations, and accounting must be handled explicitly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new agreement therefore distinguishes between what is transferred under civil law, what requires the consent of third parties, and which tax conditions must be checked separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBusiness transfer or contribution in kind?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA conversion can usually be carried out by the registered limited company purchasing the assets of the business, or by contribution in kind (apport) at the time of company formation. This product is primarily designed for \u003cstrong\u003ebusiness asset transfers\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eContributions in kind require specific corporate legal documents and an auditor's certificate. The standard template should therefore not be used as a substitute for contribution-in-kind documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAssets and value distribution\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains separate tables for fixtures, inventory, goodwill, intellectual property, accounts receivable, and other assets. Book\/tax values and agreed transfer values are kept separate to facilitate accounting and tax assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLiabilities – the company cannot unilaterally release you from personal liability\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe old product described liabilities as if they could simply be “taken over” by the limited company. That is too simplistic.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe limited company can internally undertake to carry a debt, but the sole trader is not automatically released from the bank, lessor, or other creditor. If an actual change of debtor is to take place, the creditor's consent must normally be documented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template therefore has a specific appendix for liabilities, collateral, and creditor consents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAgreements and permits are not automatically transferred\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLeasing agreements, rental agreements, supplier contracts, customer agreements, software licenses, domains, and government permits may contain prohibitions against transfer or requirements for consent. Certain permits must be applied for again when the business is moved to a new legal entity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a specific checklist for agreements, permits, and intellectual property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTransfer at under-value and withdrawal taxation\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf business assets are transferred to the limited company at a price below market value, withdrawal taxation may normally apply. However, in the case of conversion, there are rules that, under certain conditions, make it possible to transfer assets at tax value without withdrawal taxation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency’s guidance states, for the typical conversion situation, that the entire business or an entire branch of business must be transferred, that the shares must be qualified, and that the limited company should not have previous deficits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAssumed liabilities are also counted as part of the consideration for the assets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTax allocation reserve\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTax allocation reserves can, under specific conditions, be taken over by the limited company. The transfer must not, among other things, trigger withdrawal taxation, and the sole trader must make a capital contribution to the limited company corresponding to the tax allocation reserves being transferred.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe limited company must also make a corresponding provision in its accounts. The package includes specific fields for reserve amounts, years, and contributions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExpansion fund – 79.4%\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOther requirements apply to the expansion fund. According to current rules, the expansion fund can cease without reversal if, among other things, all real assets are transferred to the limited company, the business owner requests that the fund not be reversed, and a contribution equivalent to at least \u003cstrong\u003e79.4% of the expansion fund\u003c\/strong\u003e is made to the company.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis is now explicitly built into both the agreement template and the user guide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVAT on business transfers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe older product text described business transfers as generally VAT-free. The new version is more accurate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to Chapter 5, Section 38 of the Value Added Tax Act, a qualified transfer of assets in connection with a business transfer is not treated as a supply of goods or a provision of services, but only when the Act's conditions are met. Among other things, the VAT that would otherwise have been charged must be deductible or refundable for the recipient.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInvestment goods and real estate may require further VAT assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEmployees and transfer of undertakings\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the transfer falls under Section 6 b of the Employment Protection Act, rights and obligations under employment relationships may transfer to the limited company. An employee may object to the transfer, and the previous employer may still be liable for financial obligations relating to the time before the transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAny MBL (Co-determination Act) negotiations, collective agreements, and staff-related liabilities must therefore be assessed separately. The template includes a specific staff appendix.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAccounting and cut-off date\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement now has fields for a clear cut-off date, customer and supplier invoices around the transition, inventory, accounts receivable, liabilities, and the practical handover of accounting materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a general rule, accounting information must be preserved for seven years after the end of the calendar year in which the financial year ended. A conversion does not mean that historical archiving responsibility disappears.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReal estate requires separate handling\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the business includes commercial real estate, this standard template should not be used alone. Real estate transfers have specific formal requirements and may involve issues regarding title registration, stamp duty, capital taxation, and VAT adjustments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompany names, domains, trademarks, and customer registries\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIntellectual and digital assets also need to be identified explicitly. Customer registries and other personal data may not be moved casually but must be handled in accordance with applicable data protection regulations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSeven separate appendix types\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAsset inventory and value distribution\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eLiabilities, collateral, and creditor consents\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAgreements, permits, IP, and consents\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEmployees and staff-related liabilities\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTax allocation reserve, expansion fund, and tax basis\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVAT assessment and any investment goods\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAccounting, cut-off date, and practical handover\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package also includes a complete \u003cstrong\u003eBusiness Transfer Agreement – Sole Trader to Swedish Limited Company\u003c\/strong\u003e in English. The English version is a reference version and is explicitly governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen professional advice is particularly appropriate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSeek individual tax, accounting, or legal advice in cases involving significant goodwill, real estate, tax allocation\/expansion funds, multiple business branches, large loans\/leasing, employees, negative tax capital, complex VAT, or significant financial values.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/mall-for-skuldebrev-vid-overtagande-av-firma\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes the purchase price need to be documented with a promissory note? See also Promissory note for taking over a business →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile formats and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish master version + English reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 17 pages across the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I transfer everything at book value without tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot automatically. The rules on withdrawal taxation and under-value must be met. For larger values, the structure should be checked by a tax advisor or accounting consultant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo my old debts disappear when the limited company takes them over?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not automatically. An internal agreement with the limited company does not normally release you from the original creditor. Check if the creditor accepts the change of debtor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan tax allocation reserves and expansion funds be treated the same way?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. They are subject to different rules. The expansion fund, among other things, has a current contribution requirement of at least 79.4% of the fund's amount.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eShould VAT be charged on the transfer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on whether the business transfer rule in the Value Added Tax Act is applicable. The assessment must be made before invoicing and accounting for the transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the agreement suitable if the business contains real estate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a sole document. Real property requires specific documentation and a separate legal and tax assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid and does not replace individual legal, tax, or accounting advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48179797623126,"sku":"7350139912853","price":79.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/overlatelseavtal-hero-2027.png?v=1791320923"},{"product_id":"mall-for-skuldebrev-vid-overtagande-av-firma","title":"Promissory note for business takeover – Word\/PDF + English + guide","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePromissory note for business takeover\u003c\/strong\u003e – an updated 2026\/2027 package for documenting a purchase price debt when all or part of a business is transferred, for example from a sole proprietorship to a limited company. The package includes the main Swedish template in Word\/PDF, an English reference, and user guides in both Swedish and English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:20px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e2ec;border-radius:12px;background:#f8fafc\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 6, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eThe template is designed as a \u003cstrong\u003esimple promissory note\u003c\/strong\u003e (*enkelt skuldebrev*) under Swedish law and addresses issues such as purchase price debt, interest, amortization, delay, early repayment, set-off, transfer, statute of limitations, and potential collateral.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in this package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePromissory Note – DOCX\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEditable Swedish main template for purchase price debt.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePromissory Note – PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003ePrint-ready Swedish version.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains interest, payment schedule, set-off, collateral, transfer, and statute of limitations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSimple Promissory Note governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance for the same Swedish regulatory framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:24px 0;padding:18px;border:1px solid #e0c96d;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9dd\"\u003e\n\n\u003ch2 style=\"margin-top:0\"\u003eImportant correction: a simple promissory note can be transferred\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe previous product text stated that a simple promissory note cannot be transferred without the debtor's consent. This is too categorical and has now been corrected.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA simple promissory note is issued to a specific creditor and can be transferred. As a general rule, the new creditor does not gain better rights against the debtor than the previous creditor had, and the debtor’s objections and certain rights of set-off may persist. Furthermore, notification to the debtor is important both practically and in terms of property law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAdapted for purchase price debt – not just a general private loan\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template explicitly links the debt to an underlying transfer agreement. It specifies details such as the date of the business transfer, the original purchase price, any cash portion, and the part of the purchase price remaining as debt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis makes it easier to distinguish the vendor note from other debts between the parties and to document the relationship between the purchase price, final settlement, and any subsequent adjustments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSimple promissory note\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis template is intended as a \u003cstrong\u003esimple promissory note\u003c\/strong\u003e to a named creditor. It should not be used as a negotiable promissory note (*löpande skuldebrev*) to bearer or to order without first assessing the legal implications separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDebt amount and payment schedule\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe parties can choose between final payment on a specific date or amortization according to a separate payment schedule. The template includes a table for amortizations, interest, and remaining principal, as well as a specific history section for subsequent balance confirmations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInterest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template provides separate options for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003einterest-free purchase price debt,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003efixed annual interest, or\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003evariable interest based on the Riksbank's reference rate plus an agreed margin.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInterest and calculation basis should be clearly stated. If the creditor is also an owner of, or related to, the limited company, a tax assessment of market-rate interest may be necessary.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDefault interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Interest Act (*räntelagen*) regulates when default interest begins to accrue. In the case of a pre-determined due date, interest can generally accrue from the due date. The statutory level according to Section 6 of the Interest Act is the Riksbank's reference rate plus eight percentage points, unless the parties have a valid agreement leading to other terms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEarly maturity\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is an optional clause for early maturity in the event of, for example, significant payment delays or insolvency-related events. The clause is structured with written notice and a cure period rather than automatically triggering immediate maturity of the entire debt for every minor delay.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEarly repayment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template allows the debtor to repay all or part of the debt early, according to the choice made by the parties. If special compensation or restrictions are to apply, these must be explicitly documented and assessed against the circumstances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSet-off and claims under the transfer agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSince the debt is linked to a business transfer, the parties may simultaneously have claims against each other under the transfer agreement – for example, due to warranties, final settlement, or price adjustments.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template therefore includes a specific section on how set-off should be handled without attempting to override mandatory or otherwise applicable set-off rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTransfer of the promissory note\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen a simple promissory note is transferred, the new creditor normally does not gain better rights against the debtor than the previous creditor had. The debtor should be notified of the transfer so that future payments are made to the correct recipient and to ensure the transfer has the intended effect against the transferor's creditors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eStatute of limitations – normally ten years\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor the typical business receivable this template is intended for, the general limitation period is normally ten years if the limitation is not interrupted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eInterruption of the statute of limitations can occur through, among other things, the debtor acknowledging the debt, paying interest or amortization, by a written demand\/reminder, or through legal action. After an interruption, a new limitation period begins.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCollateral and guarantees\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere are options for unsecured debt or separate collateral. If a pledge, company mortgage, personal guarantee, or other security is to be used, separate documentation and sometimes additional measures are often needed to ensure the security has the intended effect under property law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen the creditor is also a shareholder or board member\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the limited company is the debtor and the creditor is also a shareholder, board member, or related party, the company's decision should be properly documented. The Companies Act (*aktiebolagslagen*) contains conflict of interest rules for the board and rules regarding board minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn a company with only one shareholder, agreements between the shareholder and the company that do not involve routine business transactions on standard terms must be noted in or added to the board's minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTax issues regarding owner loans and interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen the creditor is an owner in a closely held company (*fåmansföretag*), the interest and other terms should be reviewed from a tax perspective. The Swedish Tax Agency's guidance for loans from shareholders to closely held companies is based on market-rate interest and an individual assessment of, among other things, risk and external financing costs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA vendor note following a business transfer is not necessarily identical to a standard cash owner loan, so the tax assessment should be based on the actual setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eApplication for a payment order and court\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe promissory note is important evidence of the debt and its terms, but the document itself is not the same as a court judgment or ruling. If the debtor does not pay, the creditor may need to apply for a payment order (*betalningsföreläggande*) with the Swedish Enforcement Authority (*Kronofogden*) or initiate legal proceedings in court, depending on the situation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDispute resolution\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe old template used arbitration as a general standard. This has been removed. For a typical vendor note, a Swedish general court is a more neutral standard solution, while arbitration can be agreed upon separately when the size of the debt and the parties' commercial needs justify it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package also includes a complete \u003cstrong\u003eSimple Promissory Note – Business Transfer\u003c\/strong\u003e in English. The English version is a reference version and is explicitly governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/mall-for-overlatelseavtal-enskild-firma-till-aktiebolag\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo you also need to document the business transfer itself? See Transfer Agreement – Sole Proprietorship to Limited Company →\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFile format and delivery\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX, PDF, and ZIP.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish main version + English reference.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNumber of files:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 12 pages in the four documents.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download. No physical product is sent.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a simple promissory note be transferred without the debtor's approval?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, as a starting point, a simple promissory note can be transferred. However, the debtor's legal position is protected by specific rules, and notification of the transfer is important.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a ten-year statute of limitations always guaranteed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Ten years is the general limitation period for the type of business debt the template is primarily intended for, but specific rules and circumstances can affect the assessment. Interruption of the limitation period must also be demonstrable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the promissory note be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is no general witness requirement for this type of simple promissory note. Witnesses can be used if the parties wish to strengthen evidence regarding the signing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the promissory note include interest?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The parties can choose interest-free debt or agree on interest. In relationships between owners and the company, tax treatment should also be checked.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a pledge or guarantee clause in the promissory note always sufficient?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Depending on the type of security, separate documents, notifications, registration, or other measures may be required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp style=\"font-size:.95em;color:#4b5563\"\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis package is a general documentation aid under Swedish law and does not replace individual legal, tax, or accounting advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48180173209942,"sku":"7350139912860","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/skuldebrev-overtagande-firma-hero-2027.png?v=1791321835"},{"product_id":"konsultavtal-mall-generell","title":"Consulting Agreement Template – Swedish Law | Word\/PDF + English reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConsulting agreement template – Word\/PDF for companies under Swedish law.\u003c\/strong\u003e An editable B2B consulting agreement for independent contractors and clients who want to clearly regulate assignments, deliverables, price, F-tax, confidentiality, intellectual property rights, liability, and termination. The modernized 2027 edition includes a Swedish master version, a Swedish user guide, an English reference version, and an English guide, all in DOCX and PDF.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"padding:16px 18px;margin:18px 0;border:1px solid #dbe5ea;border-radius:12px;background:#f5f8fa\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegal framework verified October 8, 2026.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eThe template is primarily intended for \u003cstrong\u003ecommercial consulting assignments between business entities (B2B)\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is not an employment contract, consumer contract, or a pre-made data processing agreement. The parties must choose options and fill in all open fields before the document is used. Legal validity cannot be guaranteed solely by using a document template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the consulting agreement package?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e2e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConsulting Agreement – Swedish master template, DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e2e7eb\"\u003e18 contract sections plus Appendix A–C for assignments, compensation, and data protection control.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e2e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish User Guide, DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e2e7eb\"\u003ePractical guidance for completion, risk control, and signing.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e2e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eConsulting Services Agreement – English reference, DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e2e7eb\"\u003eEnglish reference of the corresponding consulting agreement expressly under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide, DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish completion and risk guide.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA total of 8 customer files.\u003c\/strong\u003e The Word documents are editable. The PDF versions are searchable A4 files suitable for reading and printing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is a consulting agreement?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA consulting agreement or service agreement regulates the independent service that a consultant is to perform for a client and the terms and conditions under which it will be provided. It can cover areas such as business development, project management, marketing, design, programming, administration, or other services. A clear agreement can reduce disputes, but the true nature of the assignment must always be assessed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003e18 sections for a more comprehensive consulting assignment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eContracting parties, application, and the order of precedence of contract appendices.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eContent, scope, and performance of the assignment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSchedule, contact persons, and independence.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe client's involvement and input.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eKey personnel, subcontractors, and F-tax.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eChange orders and additional orders.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCompensation, invoicing, VAT, and late payment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDelivery, acceptance, and rectification of errors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eConfidentiality and exceptions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIntellectual property rights and background materials.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePersonal data and information security.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eConflicts of interest, integrity, and access.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eLiability, limitation of liability, and insurance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eUnforeseen obstacles beyond the parties' control.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTerm of agreement, termination, and cancellation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe parties' obligations when the assignment ends.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eNotices, Swedish law, and dispute resolution.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSignatures of authorized representatives.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAppendix A – Assignment description and deliverables\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAppendix A is designed to describe what the consultant is actually to do. Fill in the purpose, included and excluded work, deliverables, schedule, approval criteria, the client's involvement, any subcontractors, system security, and who is authorized to order changes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTip:\u003c\/strong\u003e do not write just \"ongoing consulting work.\" Specify what is to be delivered, when, and how you will jointly verify that the delivery meets the agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAppendix B – Fees, VAT, and change orders\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChoose fixed price, hourly rate, price ceiling, or a combination. Indicate whether the amounts are excluding or including value-added tax and which VAT handling is actually applicable. Specify invoicing intervals, expense reimbursement, time tracking, and when an additional order must be approved.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Interest Act (1975:635) contains regulations on, among other things, payment terms and default interest. Differing terms between business entities must be correctly agreed upon; there is no single, universally applicable payment term for every situation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eF-tax – verify the actual form of engagement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"padding:16px 18px;margin:18px 0;border:1px solid #ead39c;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9ea\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA clause regarding an \"independent consultant\" is not sufficient if the relationship in practice resembles employment.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eVerify the contractor's approval for F-tax (or potential FA-tax) and who the actual legal contracting party is. The Swedish Tax Agency states that F-tax approval should preferably be stated in the agreement and invoice. If valid F-tax approval is missing, tax deductions and employer contributions may be triggered. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.skatteverket.se\/foretagorganisationer\/foretagare\/startaregistrera\/ffaskatt.4.58d555751259e4d661680006355.html\"\u003eRead the Swedish Tax Agency's guidance.\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor assignments via self-employment companies, it is important that the agreement is entered into with the correct party before work and invoicing are organized. The title of the agreement alone does not determine whether an employment relationship exists.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCopyright and ownership of the consultant's results\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is important to distinguish between \u003cstrong\u003enew material created for the client\u003c\/strong\u003e, the consultant's own pre-existing tools, and third-party material. The master template contains a negotiable order where economic rights to identified new deliverables transfer according to the agreement once payment has been made, while certain background tools remain with the consultant but can be licensed for the use of the result.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Copyright Act (1960:729) contains special rules, including regarding transfer, further transfer, and under certain conditions, the author's remuneration and information. Particularly valuable software, creative material, and licenses may need individually adapted provisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGDPR – a standard consulting agreement does not replace a processing agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAppendix C contains a checklist for data protection roles, categories of personal data, access, storage location, sub-processors, incident handling, and return of information. However, it is a \u003cstrong\u003escreening appendix\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a complete data processing agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the consultant processes personal data on behalf of the client, Article 28 of the GDPR normally requires a separate, binding data processing agreement that regulates processing, instructions, and protective measures. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/personuppgiftsansvariga-och-personuppgiftsbitraden\/personuppgiftsbitradesavtal\/\"\u003eSee the IMY's guidance on processing agreements.\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConfidentiality, liability, and insurance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template provides a basic structure for confidentiality with exceptions for, for example, already public or legally known information. It also contains negotiable provisions on liability caps, potential indirect damage, professional indemnity insurance, and how defects are to be rectified.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLiability limitations should not be left unfilled.\u003c\/strong\u003e Terms must be adapted to the value and risk of the agreement. According to Section 36 of the Contracts Act, unreasonable contract terms can be adjusted or disregarded.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eTermination, cancellation, and handover\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe new template distinguishes between ongoing assignments and fixed-term assignments. Fill in the notice period, whether early termination is permitted, the cure period in case of breach of contract, payment for work performed, non-cancelable costs, and practical handover. Also regulate the return of client material, removal of access, and handling of personal data.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen should you choose another agreement?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis product is a general B2B template and should not be used unaltered for employment, consumer contracts, public procurement, comprehensive technical design, international tax arrangements, or high-risk consulting. If you are to work according to a specific industry standard agreement, such as ABK 09 in relevant consulting engineering projects, the entire contract structure must be adapted instead of mixing terms without analysis.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to use the consulting agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOpen the Swedish DOCX version and identify the correct client, consultant, and authorized representatives.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVerify F-tax\/FA-tax and whether the assignment is truly independent.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFill in assignments, deliverables, schedule, and acceptance criteria in Appendix A.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eChoose compensation model, VAT handling, and cost ceiling in Appendix B.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDecide who is authorized to approve changes and additional work.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eNegotiate intellectual property rights, confidentiality, liability, and insurance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eComplete Appendix C and write a full data processing agreement if the GDPR requires it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFill in termination, cancellation, handover, and dispute resolution.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRemove all unused options and ensure all [brackets] have been replaced.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEnsure that authorized representatives approve the master agreement and all current appendices.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between a consulting agreement and an employment contract?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA consultant normally acts independently for a client, while an employee is covered by labor law regulations. The actual working relationship and circumstances determine this – not just the title of the document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the consulting agreement suitable for a sole proprietorship?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if it is a truly independent business assignment. Check F-tax, the correct contracting party, and relevant tax\/fee issues.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the consultant need to have F-tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is important to check the status because it affects, among other things, the client's obligation to make tax deductions and sometimes pay employer contributions. The requirements must be assessed according to the tax regulations for the actual situation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho owns the result of the consultant's work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt depends on the nature of the rights and the parties' valid agreement. The template contains a negotiable rights solution, but pre-existing material and third-party licenses must be handled explicitly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a data processing agreement included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Appendix C helps you assess the need. If the consultant is a data processor, a separate agreement is normally required according to GDPR Article 28.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use the documents in English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, an English reference and English guide are included, but the legal basis is Swedish law – not British or American contract law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a letter of intent or a quote appendix included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAppendix A is a structured assignment description, and Appendix B regulates compensation and change orders. They should be filled in with the project's actual details.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the template guarantee that the agreement will hold up in a dispute?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A contract template must be adapted to the parties' relationship, financial risk, statutory limitations, and the actual negotiated terms.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/sekretessavtal-nda-mall\"\u003eConfidentiality Agreement (NDA) – Swedish template\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/personuppgiftsbitradesavtal-pub-dpa-mall-2026-word-pdf\"\u003eData Processing Agreement (DPA) – Word\/PDF\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/ramavtal-mallpaket-2026-2027-word-pdf-svensk-ratt\"\u003eFramework Agreement for companies – Word\/PDF\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/kundavtal-b2b-mallpaket-2026-2027-word-pdf-english-svensk-ratt\"\u003eCustomer Agreement B2B – Swedish + English\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOfficial legal basis\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/lag-1915218-om-avtal-och-andra-rattshandlingar_sfs-1915-218\/\"\u003eThe Contracts Act (1915:218)\u003c\/a\u003e, especially Section 36; \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/rantelag-1975635_sfs-1975-635\/\"\u003ethe Interest Act (1975:635)\u003c\/a\u003e; \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/lag-1960729-om-upphovsratt-till-litterara-och_sfs-1960-729\/\"\u003ethe Copyright Act (1960:729)\u003c\/a\u003e; Swedish Tax Agency regarding F-tax; GDPR Article 28 and IMY's guidance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003csmall\u003eGeneral documentation support for Swedish commercial assignments. Legal framework verified against official sources October 8, 2026. This is not individual legal, tax, or data protection advice.\u003c\/small\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48240423338326,"sku":"7350139912983","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/konsultavtal-generell-hero-2027.png?v=1791422277"},{"product_id":"dagordning-generell-mall","title":"General Agenda Template","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral agenda template – Word and PDF for effective meetings.\u003c\/strong\u003e Create a clear meeting structure with 15 customizable agenda items, meeting tasks, responsible parties, timeframes, follow-ups, and a separate decision and action list. Especially suitable for project meetings, working meetings, planning meetings, and regular operational meetings in companies, organizations, and groups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe modernized 2027 edition is structured with a \u003cstrong\u003eSwedish main template, Swedish user guide, English reference, and English guide\u003c\/strong\u003e – each in editable Word (.docx) and searchable PDF, for a total of eight files.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"padding:16px 18px;margin:18px 0;border:1px solid #d8e4eb;border-radius:12px;background:#f5f9fb\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant limitation – general meeting template, not a legal power of attorney or minutes template.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eThe template helps you plan and follow up on meetings. However, it does not grant participants the authority to make decisions and does not guarantee that a general meeting of shareholders, a legally regulated board meeting, or an association meeting complies with their specific formal requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThis is included in the new document edition\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e1e7ec\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral agenda – Swedish DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e1e7ec\"\u003e15 agenda items, meeting framework, times, responsibilities, and checklist.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e1e7ec\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish User Guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e1e7ec\"\u003ePractical steps for planning, conducting, and following up on meetings.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e1e7ec\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGeneral Meeting Agenda – English reference DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e1e7ec\"\u003eEnglish-language reference for informal and business-related meetings.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance and clear limitations.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e DOCX and searchable A4-PDF. \u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish + English. \u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is an agenda?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn agenda is a pre-compiled list of issues to be addressed at a meeting. It helps participants prepare, set the right priorities, and know what is to be decided, discussed, or followed up on. An agenda is not the same as minutes: the minutes document what actually happened and what decisions were made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003e15 flexible agenda items\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOpening and purpose of the meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eParticipants, roles, and conflicts of interest.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEstablishing the proposed agenda when the meeting type allows.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePrevious decisions and status.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSituation report: goals, results, and key performance indicators.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFinance, resources, and risks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOngoing activities and projects.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDecision point 1 with decision documentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDecision point 2 with decision documentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIssues to be prepared for a later meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eResponsible parties, deadlines, and action list.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eInformation to stakeholders and communication.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTime and preparation for the next meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOther business within the meeting's mandate.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eClosing the meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAll items are editable. Remove or add them as needed for the actual meeting. For formal meetings, however, the notice and agenda may need to follow specific numbering and rules – therefore, do not copy the layout mechanically.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFor working meetings, project meetings, and operational meetings\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is suitable for, for example, weekly meetings, project syncs, planning, working group meetings, budget reviews, and smaller management meetings. Since the purpose, meeting chair, time, format, and responsibilities are specified, you can use the same structured method on-site, digitally, and in hybrid meetings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDistinguish between information, discussion, and decisions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEach item can be labeled by type. An \u003cstrong\u003einformation point\u003c\/strong\u003e usually does not require a decision. A \u003cstrong\u003ediscussion point\u003c\/strong\u003e is used to investigate alternatives. A \u003cstrong\u003edecision point\u003c\/strong\u003e should have a concrete proposal, relevant documentation, and clear information on who has the authority to make decisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eExample:\u003c\/strong\u003e \"The project group must obtain three quotes by [date]. [Name] is responsible and will present the documentation at the next meeting.\" If a binding agreement or other formal action requires authorized board or member approval, this decision must be made separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFollow-up and action list included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn addition to the agenda, there is a separate table with fields for item, decision or next step, person responsible, and deadline. This makes it easier to carry over open questions to the next meeting and follow up on activities without losing track of responsibility distribution.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhich meetings require a special template?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"padding:16px 18px;margin:18px 0;border:1px solid #ead6aa;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9e9\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA general agenda cannot replace special rules for all organizations.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eIn a limited company, the annual general meeting and other general meetings are governed by Chapter 7 of the Swedish Companies Act. The board's meeting and minute rules are covered in Chapter 8. For non-profit associations, statutes and principles of association law are central. Economic associations, municipalities, authorities, and school bodies are covered by their own rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExamples of situations where you should use special documents:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnnual General Meeting (AGM) in limited companies:\u003c\/strong\u003e check notice, numbered agenda, voting register, and mandatory decisions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eBoard meeting in limited companies:\u003c\/strong\u003e check quorum, conflicts of interest, mandate, and minute-taking requirements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnnual meeting in non-profit associations:\u003c\/strong\u003e follow the statutes for notice, elections, voting rights, rules of procedure, and minutes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eEconomic associations:\u003c\/strong\u003e the Economic Associations Act (2018:672) may impose special requirements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePublic sector:\u003c\/strong\u003e applicable public law rules may govern notice, forms of decision-making, and documentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to use the template step by step\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOpen the Swedish DOCX version and fill in the meeting type, date, time, location\/digital format, and organizer.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDescribe the purpose of the meeting in one sentence.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSelect which of the 15 items are relevant and add meeting-specific issues.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMark which points are for information, discussion, follow-up, or actual decision proposals.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAssign responsible parties, planned time required, and which attachments should be read in advance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSend the agenda to participants well in advance and check for any notice requirements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTake meeting notes or separate minutes when necessary.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDistribute activities and document responsible parties and deadlines.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSave material securely and follow up on actions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions about general agendas\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I edit all the items?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the main template is a standard Word file with editable tables, date fields, and agenda items. The PDF version is primarily intended for printing or digital reading.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the agenda be used for staff meetings?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, regular staff, project, and working group meetings are examples of suitable areas of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it for board meetings in limited companies?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a preparatory checklist, yes. However, it does not replace the Swedish Companies Act's rules on board decisions and minutes and should be supplemented or replaced with a specific board template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it legally valid for all associations?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Statutes and applicable legislation vary. There is no single general association law that regulates all Swedish association forms in the same way.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre meeting minutes included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package has a decision and action list, but it is not a complete separate set of minutes for formal meetings. Select a specific minute template when one is needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the template also available in English?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, the modernized edition includes an English reference agenda and an English user guide, both in Word and PDF.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated document templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/dagordning-for-arsmote-aktiebolag-mall\"\u003eAgenda for Annual General Meeting in limited companies\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/protokoll-for-styrelsemote-aktiebolag-mall\"\u003eBoard minutes for limited companies\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/dagordning-for-konstituerande-mote-forening-mall\"\u003eAgenda for constituent meeting in non-profit associations\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/foreningsprotokoll-arsmote-styrelse-2026-2027\"\u003eAssociation minutes – annual meeting, board meeting, and constituent meeting\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLegal references and limitations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/aktiebolagslag-2005551_sfs-2005-551\/\"\u003eThe Swedish Companies Act (2005:551)\u003c\/a\u003e, especially chapters 7–8, applies to certain general meetings and board meetings in limited companies. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www4.skatteverket.se\/rattsligvagledning\/edition\/2026.13\/1741.html\"\u003eThe Swedish Tax Agency's guidance on non-profit associations\u003c\/a\u003e describes the role that statutes and practice have for these associations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003csmall\u003eGeneral documentation and meeting support. Relevant legal boundaries checked against official sources October 8, 2026. No specific law guarantees that a general meeting agenda is sufficient for every form of organization.\u003c\/small\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48240523608406,"sku":"7350139913003","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/dagordning-generell-hero-2027.png?v=1791419790"},{"product_id":"dagordning-for-styrelsemote-for-fastighetsbolag-mall","title":"Agenda Template for a Board Meeting of a Property Company","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBoard Meeting Agenda for Property Companies – Word\/PDF according to Swedish law.\u003c\/strong\u003e A structured template for boards of Swedish limited companies (aktiebolag) that own, lease, or manage properties. It combines corporate governance meeting topics with practical property-related issues: finance, cash flow, tenants, operations, maintenance, investments, loan terms, mandatory ventilation inspections (OVK), energy performance certificates, fire safety, and risk management.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe 2027 package includes the \u003cstrong\u003eSwedish master agenda and user guide, as well as an English reference version and English guide\u003c\/strong\u003e. All four documents are provided in Word (DOCX) and searchable A4 PDF – a total of eight files.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"padding:16px;margin:20px 0;border:1px solid #dae5ed;border-radius:12px;background:#f5f8fa\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegal framework checked October 8, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eDesigned based on the Swedish Companies Act (2005:551), particularly Chapter 8, as well as relevant official guidance from the Swedish National Board of Housing, Building and Planning (Boverket) and the Swedish Authority for Privacy Protection (IMY). It is a practical documentation aid, not a guarantee of regulatory compliance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded – eight customer files\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"border-collapse:collapse;width:100%\"\u003e\n\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e2e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish master agenda – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e2e7eb\"\u003e16 agenda items, company\/property portfolio identification, and pre-decision checklist.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e2e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e2e7eb\"\u003eHow to complete the template; quorum, disqualification (conflict of interest), report packages, property requirements, and separate minutes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e2e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e2e7eb\"\u003eProperty Company Board Meeting Agenda, expressly under Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish-language user instructions and legal limits.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital ZIP. \u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e editable DOCX and searchable PDF. \u003cstrong\u003ePrimary language:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish. \u003cstrong\u003eReference language:\u003c\/strong\u003e English.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFor which businesses is the template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is intended for \u003cstrong\u003eproperty limited companies\u003c\/strong\u003e, such as companies with rental housing, commercial premises, mixed portfolios, or professional property management. The company may own one or more properties; the agenda must be adapted to actual conditions, the articles of association, and the board's responsibilities.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant distinction:\u003c\/strong\u003e it is not a board agenda for a housing cooperative (bostadsrättsförening) or a joint property association (samfällighetsförening). It should not be used as an agenda for an Annual General Meeting (AGM): the shareholders' general meeting and the board are different bodies with different powers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe 16 points of the agenda\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOpening of the meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAttendance, disqualification, and quorum.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSelection of minutes keeper and certifiers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eApproval of the agenda.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFollow-up on previous minutes and decisions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFinance, net operating income, liquidity, rent receivables, and loan terms.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eProperty management, tenants, and contractors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMaintenance, renovations, and investments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSafety, regulatory requirements, and property inspections.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eInsurance, risk management, and personal data.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFinancing, refinancing, and property transactions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDisqualification and conflicts of interest regarding related-party issues.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDecision items with precise mandates and monetary limits.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eReporting, internal control, and division of responsibilities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eNext board meeting and action plan.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eClosing of the meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAll points are suggestions. A board should only address matters that are necessary and for which sufficient decision-making documentation exists for the current meeting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eQuorum and majority in the board of a limited company\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to the main rule in Chapter 8, Section 21 of the Swedish Companies Act, the board is quorate when \u003cstrong\u003emore than half of the total number of board members\u003c\/strong\u003e are present, unless the articles of association prescribe a higher number. A member who is disqualified from a specific matter is considered absent when assessing the quorum for that matter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to Chapter 8, Section 22, the opinion supported by more than half of those present normally prevails. In the event of a tie, the chair has the casting vote. If the board is not at full strength, the requirement generally applies that the yes-votes constitute more than one-third of the entire board, unless otherwise specified in the articles of association.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe board must also have received satisfactory supporting documentation and members must have had the opportunity, as far as possible, to participate in the handling of the matter. Therefore, specific check-points are included for the meeting documents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProperty economics and financial reports\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eProperty companies often need more detailed ongoing management information than a general meeting agenda provides. The report package may include net operating income, budget deviations, interest rate hedging and debt maturity, loan terms, amortization plans, liquidity forecasts, rent receivables, rent adjustments, and vacancy rates.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor major financing, acquisitions, sales, or pledging of security, the decision documentation should describe the counterparty, monetary limits, security, risks, any requirements for shareholder approval, and who is authorized to execute the decision. The template does not replace the actual financing or property transfer agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProperty operations and planned maintenance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agenda has specific points for building operations, tenant matters, contractor follow-up, material defects, maintenance plans, and investments. For every major project, the board can document the project description, budget, procurement documentation, regulatory permits, risk assessment, and timeline in separate decision documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOVK, energy performance certificates, and regulatory inspections\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"padding:16px;margin:18px 0;border:1px solid #e4cf91;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9e6\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRequirements differ between properties.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eThe template is a reminder to check obligations, not a ready-made technical inspection plan. The property owner is responsible for mandatory ventilation inspections (OVK) where required, but exceptions and intervals depend, among other things, on the building and ventilation system. Requirements for energy performance certificates, validity, and exceptions must also be checked per building.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn energy performance certificate is normally valid for ten years. There are regulatory changes coming into effect from 2027, making it important to check \u003cem\u003ewhich rule applies when the measure is to be implemented\u003c\/em\u003e. The board can follow up that the responsible manager monitors valid certificates and plans upcoming inspections.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor OVK and energy performance certificates, please refer to \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.boverket.se\/sv\/PBL-kunskapsbanken\/regler-om-byggande\/ovk\/\"\u003eBoverket's OVK guidance\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.boverket.se\/sv\/energideklaration\/energideklaration\/dessa-byggnader-ska-energideklareras\"\u003eBoverket's energy performance certificate information\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFire safety and security\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eProperty owners and tenants have obligations under the Act (2003:778) on Protection against Accidents. The distribution of responsibilities is affected by, among other things, control over the building and how the premises are used. As a board agenda item, one can follow up on the fire safety organization, deficiencies, inspection results, contractors, and timelines for measures; the need for documentation is assessed based on the business.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGDPR, tenants, and potential camera surveillance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLandlords often handle personal data in lease agreements, payments, disturbance issues, and other processes. Camera surveillance is a separate issue: IMY (the Swedish Authority for Privacy Protection) considers that surveillance of entrances and stairwells in residential buildings can be particularly privacy-sensitive. Merely owning a property does not give the right to install surveillance cameras; purpose, legal basis, and proportionality must be assessed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSee \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/kamerabevakning\/sa-gor-ni-intresseavvagningen-pa-olika-platser\/bostadsrattsforeningar-och-hyresvardar\/\"\u003eIMY's guidance for landlords\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAn agenda is not board minutes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Companies Act requires minutes for board meetings. According to Chapter 8, Section 24, the minutes keeper must sign the minutes. The chair must certify them if the chair did not keep the minutes themselves. If the board has several members, a member appointed by the board must also certify them. Board members and the CEO have the right to have a dissenting opinion recorded.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to Chapter 8, Section 26, board minutes must be numbered in sequence and stored in a secure manner. \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/protokoll-for-styrelsemote-aktiebolag-mall\"\u003eSee separate template for board minutes in limited companies.\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to use the template\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDownload the ZIP package and open the Swedish DOCX version.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEnter the company name, corporate registration number, meeting date, and portfolio\/reporting period.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRemove points that do not apply to the company and supplement according to the articles of association.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAttach relevant reports and proposals in good time before the meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCheck which members are allowed to participate in each matter and that a quorum exists.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDistinguish report items from formal decisions; use exact decision wording with a responsible party and deadline.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCheck property-specific legal requirements for each relevant building and the current date.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eKeep separate board minutes during the meeting, with correct signing and certification.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFollow up on the decisions and store minutes and decision documentation securely.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs there a legal requirement to use a specific agenda template?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. There is no general formal requirement for a specific standardized agenda for all limited company boards. However, rules apply to the board's procedures, decisions, and minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used at an Annual General Meeting (AGM)?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo, not without a completely different structure. The AGM is the decision-making body of the shareholders and handles, among other things, the annual report, approval of accounts, allocation of profit\/loss, and discharge from liability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work for a property company without an auditor?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, to the extent that a private limited company legally lacks an auditor. The agenda must be adapted to the company's actual auditor status and reporting needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAre OVK and energy performance certificates always mandatory for every building?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The obligations vary depending on building type, use, ventilation system, exemptions, and applicable dates. The company needs to check the requirements for each building.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the board make all conceivable property decisions through this template?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A template provides structure but not authority. Major transactions, disqualifications, shareholder issues, and special legal requirements must always be assessed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs English documentation included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. An English reference agenda and an English User Guide are included in Word and PDF, expressly according to Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLegal sources\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/aktiebolagslag-2005551_sfs-2005-551\/\"\u003eSwedish Companies Act (2005:551), Chapter 8\u003c\/a\u003e; Boverket on OVK and energy performance certificates; IMY on personal data and camera surveillance; and the Act (2003:778) on Protection against Accidents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003csmall\u003eGeneral documentation aid, legal framework checked October 8, 2026. The product is intended for a Swedish property limited company, not a housing cooperative, joint property association, or Annual General Meeting. Always check company-specific and building-specific conditions. The template does not replace legal, technical, or accounting advice.\u003c\/small\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48240617849174,"sku":"7350139913027","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/dagordning-styrelsemote-fastighetsbolag-hero-2027.png?v=1791416638"},{"product_id":"dagordning-konstituerande-styrelsemote-aktiebolag","title":"Agenda Template for Constitutive Board Meeting – Swedish Limited Company","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAgenda for the constitutive board meeting in a limited company\u003c\/strong\u003e – a Swedish master template for the board's first organizational meeting after the date of the memorandum of association. The package includes a Swedish master agenda, a Swedish user guide, an English reference, and an English guide – all in DOCX and PDF formats.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e4ea;border-radius:12px;background:#f5f8fa\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegal framework reviewed: October 8, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eDesigned based on the Swedish Companies Act (2005:551) and current guidance from the Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket). The term \"constitutive board meeting\" is used practically for the board's first organizational meeting; it is not a separate incorporation body.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eImportant correction compared to many older templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px;border:1px solid #e4cf91;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9e6\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe board does not incorporate the company at this meeting.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eThe limited company is incorporated through the memorandum of association. The articles of association are included in the memorandum, and the first board and auditor, when applicable, are specified therein. Therefore, the board shall not decide again on incorporation, adopt the articles of association, or elect the first board\/auditor at the constitutive board meeting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the 2027 package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish master agenda – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e14 structured items for the board's first organizational meeting, with legal boundaries and decision support.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eExplains what has already been decided, registration status, chair, CEO, authorized signatories, minutes, and registration matters.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eFirst \/ constitutive Board meeting agenda governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance to the same Swedish company law structure.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTotal of 8 customer files.\u003c\/strong\u003e The Word files are editable, and the PDF versions are searchable A4 documents. The product is delivered digitally.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template used?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is primarily intended for the first board meeting after the memorandum of association has been signed. The Swedish Companies Registration Office expressly states that a newly started company's first board meeting should take place after the date of the memorandum of association.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt can also serve as a checklist when a new board needs to organize its work, but it is not intended as a template for minutes and does not replace the decisions of the general meeting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSuggested items for the first board meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOpening of the meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAttendance, deputy members, and quorum.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eElection of meeting chair if necessary.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eElection of minutes keeper and verifier.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eApproval of the agenda.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eReview of memorandum of association, articles of association, and registration status.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eElection of the board chair if the matter has not already been settled.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDecision on CEO and any deputy CEO if relevant.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAuthorized signatories and any special authorized signatories.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBanking, payment, and administrative authorizations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eReporting procedures and working methods.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOther organizational start-up issues.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eNext board meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eClosing of the meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eBoard Chair\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the board has more than one member, one of the members must be the chair. The board elects the chair unless otherwise prescribed in the articles of association or already decided by the general meeting. In a public limited company, the CEO may not be the board chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eQuorum and majority\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a main rule, the board has a quorum when more than half of the total number of board members are present, unless the articles of association require a higher number. A member who is conflicted in a specific matter is counted as absent in that matter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnless the articles of association state otherwise, the opinion that more than half of those present vote for is normally carried. In the event of a tied vote, the chair has the casting vote. If the board is not full, those voting for the decision must also constitute more than one-third of the entire board.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNo shareholder voting list at the board meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA voting list of shareholders belongs to the general meeting, not the board. At a board meeting, you should instead document which members and any deputy members are participating and whether the board has a quorum.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIf the company is not yet registered\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px;border:1px solid #e4cf91;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9e6\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBe particularly careful with agreements prior to registration.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003ePrior to registration, the company, as a main rule, cannot itself acquire rights or assume obligations. Anyone participating in a legal transaction in the company's name before registration may incur personal liability. Therefore, the guide includes a specific check point for registration status before external agreements or other commitments are made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCEO\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe board may appoint a CEO. A private limited company does not need to have a CEO, whereas a public limited company must always have a CEO. If a CEO is appointed, the decision, effective date, and any instructions\/division of work should be properly documented and the registration matter followed up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAuthorized signatories\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe board represents the company and signs for its firm. The board may also appoint a board member, CEO, or another person as a special authorized signatory, provided the articles of association do not prevent it. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is important to distinguish between registered signatories and internal attestation, bank, or amount limits. The Swedish Companies Registration Office registers who is authorized to sign for the firm, not standard internal amount limitations.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReporting procedures and working methods\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe board shall provide written instructions regarding reporting to the board when necessary for the board's assessment, except when the company's limited size and operations make the instructions insignificant. \u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor public limited companies, there are also specific requirements for an annual written rules of procedure as well as written instructions regarding the division of work between the board, the CEO, and other bodies. In private limited companies, a similar structure can be practically useful without the same specific public requirements applying.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAgenda and minutes are different documents\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis product is an \u003cstrong\u003eagenda\u003c\/strong\u003e. During the board meeting itself, board minutes must be kept, and the decisions made by the board must be recorded. The minutes keeper signs the minutes; the chair verifies them if they did not keep them personally, and if the board has several members, a member appointed by the board must also verify them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eItems the template expressly advises against\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\"Decision to form the company\" – the company is formed through the memorandum of association.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\"Adoption of the articles of association\" – the articles of association are included in the memorandum of association.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\"Election of the first board\" – the first board is stated in the memorandum of association.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\"Election of the first auditor\" – stated in the memorandum of association when an auditor is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\"Establishment of shareholder voting list\" – the board meeting instead documents the members' attendance and quorum.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\"Decision on board fees\" – board fees are decided by the general meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAfter the meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePrepare and verify the board minutes with the decisions that were actually made. Then check which decisions need to be reported to the Swedish Companies Registration Office, for example, details regarding the board chair, CEO, special authorized signatory, or changed signing authority.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/protokoll-for-styrelsemote-aktiebolag-mall\"\u003eMinutes for Board Meeting – Limited Company\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/dagordning-generell-mall\"\u003eAgenda – general template\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a limited company have to have a constitutive board meeting by that name?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The term is used practically for the first organizational board meeting. The key is that the board handles the issues that actually fall within its competence and that any decisions are properly documented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the board adopt the articles of association at the first meeting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Upon incorporation, the articles of association are included in the memorandum of association.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho elects the first board?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUpon incorporation, the first board is stated in the memorandum of association. The board does not, therefore, elect its own first members at the constitutive meeting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes a private limited company have to appoint a CEO?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The board may appoint a CEO in a private limited company. Public limited companies, however, must have a CEO.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the board decide on a special authorized signatory?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if the articles of association do not prevent or limit it. The decision should be precisely formulated and the registration matter followed up.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the company enter into agreements before registration?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere are specific limitations and a risk of personal liability before registration. External commitments before registration should therefore be assessed carefully.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOfficial legal basis\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/aktiebolagslag-2005551_sfs-2005-551\/\"\u003eThe Swedish Companies Act (2005:551)\u003c\/a\u003e, particularly Chapter 2 on incorporation and Chapter 8 on company management. Practical guidance: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/bolagsverket.se\/foretag\/aktiebolag\/startaaktiebolag\/stiftelseurkundforaktiebolag.481.html\"\u003eThe Swedish Companies Registration Office – memorandum of association\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/bolagsverket.se\/foretag\/aktiebolag\/startaaktiebolag\/styrelseochverkstallandedirektoriaktiebolag.505.html\"\u003eboard and CEO\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/bolagsverket.se\/foretag\/aktiebolag\/startaaktiebolag\/firmateckningiaktiebolag.519.html\"\u003eauthorized signatories\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/bolagsverket.se\/foretag\/aktiebolag\/drivaaktiebolag\/tabeslutiaktiebolaget\/styrelsemote.549.html\"\u003eboard meeting\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003csmall\u003eGeneral documentation support according to Swedish law. Legal framework checked against official sources on October 8, 2026. The template does not replace individual legal advice and does not guarantee that a specific decision or registration matter will be accepted.\u003c\/small\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48240666313046,"sku":"7350139913041","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/dagordning-konstituerande-styrelsemote-hero-2027.png?v=1791414579"},{"product_id":"protokoll-for-styrelsemote-aktiebolag-mall","title":"Minutes for Board Meeting – Limited Company | Word\/PDF + English reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBoard meeting minutes for limited companies – Swedish Word and PDF template in accordance with Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e for Swedish limited companies that want to document an actual board meeting in a clear and structured manner. The package contains a Swedish main template, a Swedish user guide, an English reference, and an English guide – all in DOCX and PDF.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e4ea;border-radius:12px;background:#f5f8fa\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegal framework reviewed: October 8, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eDesigned based on Chapter 8 of the Swedish Companies Act (2005:551) and current guidance from the Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket). The template is general documentation support and must be adapted to the articles of association, the current board composition, any rules of procedure, and the decisions actually taken.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in this package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish board minutes – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eMain template with attendance, quorum, conflict of interest, decision items, dissenting opinions, authorization to execute, and signature\/verification fields.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide on quorum, majority, conflict of interest, signatures, numbering sequence, storage, and per capsulam.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish reference version governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance for the same Swedish corporate law framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTotal of 8 customer files.\u003c\/strong\u003e The Word versions are editable and the PDF versions are searchable A4 documents. The product is delivered digitally.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFor an actual board meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe product is intended for a board meeting where the members actually participate physically, digitally, or in hybrid form. It is not designed as a standard template for per capsulam decisions where the board does not convene.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho should convene a board meeting?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to Chapter 8, Section 18 of the Swedish Companies Act, the chair of the board shall ensure that meetings are held when necessary. The board must also be convened if a board member or the managing director requests it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf a member cannot attend and there is an alternate who is to step in, the alternate must be given the opportunity to do so in accordance with applicable rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eQuorum – more than half of the entire board\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px;border:1px solid #e4cf91;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9e6\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eQuorum is not determined solely based on those who happen to be present.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eThe board is normally quorate when more than half of the total number of board members are present, unless the articles of association require a higher number. A member with a conflict of interest is considered not present when assessing the current matter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDecisions should also not be taken unless all members, as far as possible, have had the opportunity to participate in the proceedings and have received satisfactory decision-making material.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eMajority rules\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnless the articles of association provide otherwise, the main rule is that the opinion for which more than half of those present vote prevails. In the event of a tie, the chair has the casting vote.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the board is not at full strength, those voting for the decision must also constitute more than one-third of the total number of board members, unless the articles of association state otherwise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConflict of interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChapter 8, Section 23 contains rules on when a board member may not handle a matter, including certain agreements between the member and the company or where the member has a significant opposing interest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe rules contain exceptions, so the template does not treat every connection as an automatic conflict of interest. Instead, it includes a clear space to document that a member did not participate in a specific matter when conflict-of-interest rules actually apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat must board minutes contain?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChapter 8, Section 24 requires that minutes are kept at board meetings and that the board's decisions are recorded. The law does not require every discussion to be recorded verbatim.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor clear corporate governance and evidence, the template also includes fields for:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecompany name and corporate registration number,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003emeeting number, date, time, and meeting format,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003epresent members and other participants,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003equorum and conflict of interest,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ematters addressed,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eexact decision text,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003evoting results and dissenting opinions when relevant,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eauthorization to execute decisions when actually granted.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eProper signature and verification\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is more precise than simply writing \"the chair shall sign\". The Swedish Companies Act specifies the following structure:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe minute-taker signs\u003c\/strong\u003e the minutes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIf the chair did not keep the minutes themselves, the \u003cstrong\u003echair must verify\u003c\/strong\u003e them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIf the board has several members, \u003cstrong\u003eone member appointed by the board must also verify\u003c\/strong\u003e the minutes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template has separate signature fields for these roles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDissenting opinion\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA board member and the managing director have the right to have a dissenting opinion recorded in the minutes. The template therefore includes a specific space for reservations or dissenting opinions when requested.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompanies with a single shareholder\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn companies with only one shareholder, Chapter 8, Section 25 contains a special rule regarding certain agreements between the shareholder and the company. Agreements that are not routine business transactions on customary terms shall be recorded in or added to the board minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNumbering sequence and storage\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to Chapter 8, Section 26, board minutes must be kept in a consecutive numbering sequence and stored in a secure manner. The template therefore includes a meeting number and is designed so that appendices can be referenced and stored together with the correct minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePer capsulam is a different form of decision\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn per capsulam, the board does not meet physically or digitally. The Swedish Companies Registration Office emphasizes that the documentation should therefore not contain contradictory phrasing regarding, for example, meeting location, meeting chair, or verifiers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor per capsulam decisions that are to form the basis for registration, the Swedish Companies Registration Office specifies, among other things, that the document must show the date of decision, participating board members, and the decision, and be signed by all board members. This product is therefore marketed as \u003cstrong\u003eboard meeting minutes\u003c\/strong\u003e, not as a general template for all board decisions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon use cases\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOrdinary board meetings and business follow-ups.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBudget, financing, and investment decisions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDecisions regarding the managing director when applicable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSignatory authority decisions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAgreements or projects requiring board approval.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFollow-up of risk, liquidity, finances, and previous decisions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen customization should be considered\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eNew share issues, warrants, or convertibles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCapital deficiency and balance sheet for liquidation purposes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMerger, demerger, liquidation, or major restructuring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eComplex related-party transactions or conflict-of-interest issues.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePublic\/listed companies with special requirements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePer capsulam decisions that are to be registered.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDecisions with special requirements for majorities, valuations, statements, or notifications.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish main template is primary in this product. The English reference is included as language and communication support and is explicitly governed by Swedish law. It should not be treated as a British, American, or general international board minutes template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated template\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/protokoll-for-styrelsemote-engelska-aktiebolag-mall\"\u003eBoard Meeting Minutes – English-first sister product\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow many members must be present?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a main rule, more than half of the total number of members, unless the articles of association require more. A conflicted member is counted as absent in the specific matter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat majority is required?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNormally more than half of the votes of those present, with the chair's casting vote in the event of a tie. If the board is not at full strength, the one-third rule also applies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust all discussions be written down?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The law's core requirement is that the board's decisions are recorded. It may be wise to document relevant background, but the minutes do not need to be a verbatim transcript.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWho must sign?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe minute-taker signs. The chair verifies if the chair did not take the minutes themselves. If the board has several members, one member appointed by the board must also verify.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a member reserve their opinion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A board member and the managing director have the right to have a dissenting opinion recorded.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the template be used for per capsulam?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot without significant adaptation. Per capsulam is a different form of decision-making, and the Swedish Companies Registration Office has specific practical requirements for documentation in registration matters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOfficial legal basis\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/aktiebolagslag-2005551_sfs-2005-551\/\"\u003eThe Swedish Companies Act (2005:551)\u003c\/a\u003e, Chapter 8, Sections 18–26. See also the Swedish Companies Registration Office's guidance on board meetings and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/bolagsverket.se\/foretag\/aktiebolag\/drivaaktiebolag\/tabeslutiaktiebolaget\/tabeslututanatttraffaspercapsulam.5855.html\"\u003eper capsulam\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003csmall\u003eGeneral documentation support according to Swedish law. Legal framework checked against official sources October 8, 2026. The template does not guarantee that a specific decision is valid and does not replace individual corporate legal advice.\u003c\/small\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48240698622294,"sku":"7350139913058","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/protokoll-styrelsemote-aktiebolag-hero-2027.png?v=1791412712"},{"product_id":"template-engelska","title":"Power of attorney for CEO Branch Template (English) Word\/PDF Swedish Law","description":"\u003ch2\u003e Product description for Document template: Power of Attorney for CEO of Branch (English)\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e Introduction\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e Our document template \"Power of Attorney for CEO for Branch\" is the perfect solution for companies that establish a branch in Sweden and need to give power of attorney to their CEO. The template is carefully designed according to Swedish legislation and can be downloaded immediately after purchase. It is delivered in Word, PDF and Excel formats to ensure maximum flexibility and ease of use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e Product details\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e This document template is designed to meet the legal requirements in Sweden and provides VD\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e for a branch authority to act on behalf of the company. The template contains all the necessary clauses and provisions required to ensure that the power of attorney is valid and effective.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e Features and Benefits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eLegally Approved\u003c\/strong\u003e : The template is designed in accordance with Swedish legislation, which ensures that it meets all legal requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUser-friendly\u003c\/strong\u003e : The document is easy to fill out and can be adapted to specific needs and requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFlexible Format\u003c\/strong\u003e : Delivered in Word, PDF and Excel formats to suit all needs and preferences.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eInstant Download\u003c\/strong\u003e : Available for instant download after purchase, saving time and effort.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eDetailed Guidance\u003c\/strong\u003e : Includes detailed instructions and examples to facilitate the process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e Contents of the Document Template\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eIntroduction and Definition of the Parties\u003c\/strong\u003e : Names and addresses of both the main company and the CEO\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e for the branch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003ePowers\u003c\/strong\u003e : Specific list of what powers are given to the CEO\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e , including but not limited to representation, management, financial transactions and legal actions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eRestrictions\u003c\/strong\u003e : Clear restrictions to protect the main company's interests.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eValidity period and Revocation\u003c\/strong\u003e : Time frame for the validity of the power of attorney and how it can be revoked.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eApplicable Law\u003c\/strong\u003e : Specification that the document is governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eSignatures and Witnesses\u003c\/strong\u003e : Requirement of signatures from authorized parties and any witnesses to ensure validity.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e Relevant Laws and Legislation\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e To ensure that the power of attorney is legally binding and correct according to Swedish law, the following laws and acts should be taken into account:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eThe Contracts Act (1915:218)\u003c\/strong\u003e : Regulates how contracts and powers of attorney are drawn up and what requirements are set.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eThe Accounting Act (1999:1078)\u003c\/strong\u003e : Rules for accounting as CEO\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e Must follow.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eAktiebolagslagen (2005:551)\u003c\/strong\u003e : Rules on how companies must be governed and what powers the CEO has\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e have.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eThe Companies and Simple Companies Act (1980:1102)\u003c\/strong\u003e : Regulates the operations of branches of foreign companies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAct on branches of foreign companies (1992:160)\u003c\/strong\u003e : Specific legislation that regulates branches of foreign companies in Sweden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003e1. What is a power of attorney?\u003c\/strong\u003e A power of attorney is a legal document that gives one person (the power of attorney) the right to act and make decisions on behalf of another person (the power of attorney).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003e2. Why does a CEO of a branch need a power of attorney?\u003c\/strong\u003e CEO\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e need a power of attorney to legally represent and make decisions for the branch in Sweden. This includes entering into contracts, handling bank transactions and other business documents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003e3. How long is a power of attorney valid?\u003c\/strong\u003e The power of attorney's validity period is determined by what is stated in the document. It can be until further notice or for a specific period of time.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003e4. Can a power of attorney be revoked?\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, a power of attorney can be revoked at any time by the power of attorney. This should be done in writing and properly documented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e5. Does the power of attorney have to be witnessed?\u003c\/strong\u003e In some cases, such as real estate transactions, the power of attorney is required to be witnessed by two independent persons. However, this is not a requirement for all types of powers of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e Tips for Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eCustomize the Document\u003c\/strong\u003e : Make sure all the specific details for your company and the branch are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eConsult a Lawyer\u003c\/strong\u003e : Although the template is legally designed, it may be good to have a lawyer review the document before using it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eKeep Copies\u003c\/strong\u003e : Keep a copy of the signed power of attorney in the company's archives and a copy with the CEO\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv\u003e\u003cbr\u003e\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e for the branch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e This is how you use the document template\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eDownload the document\u003c\/strong\u003e : After purchase, you can download the template in Word, PDF or Excel format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFill in Information\u003c\/strong\u003e : Enter all necessary information such as name, address, authority and validity period.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eReview and Sign\u003c\/strong\u003e : Have authorized people review and sign the document. If necessary, include witnesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eSave and Archive\u003c\/strong\u003e : Keep the signed power of attorney in a safe place and share copies with relevant parties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003e Conclusion\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e Our \"Power of Attorney to CEO for Branch\" template is a comprehensive and user-friendly solution for companies that need to give power of attorney to their CEO in order to legally operate in Sweden. With clear instructions, legal compliance and flexibility in format, this template offers everything you need to quickly and efficiently draw up a valid power of attorney.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c!----\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48240724738390,"sku":"7350139913768","price":99.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/MallforFullmakttillVD_Filial_Engelska.png?v=1720687797"},{"product_id":"protokoll-for-styrelsemote-engelska-aktiebolag-mall","title":"Board Meeting Minutes – Board Meeting Minutes | Swedish Law | Word\/PDF + guide","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBoard Meeting Minutes for a Swedish Limited Company (AB)\u003c\/strong\u003e – an English-first board minutes template for documenting decisions at an actual board meeting under Swedish company law. The package contains an editable English main template, an English user guide, a Swedish reference version and a Swedish reference guide – each in DOCX and PDF.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e4ea;border-radius:12px;background:#f5f8fa\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegal framework checked: 8 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003ePrepared with reference to Chapter 8 of the Swedish Companies Act (2005:551), as currently in force, and current guidance from the Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket). This is general corporate-document support and must be adapted to the company's Articles of Association, current Board composition, any Board rules of procedure and the decisions actually taken.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Board Meeting Minutes – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eMain template with attendance, quorum, conflicts, decision sections, dissent, implementation authority and signature\/verification fields.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance on quorum, majority, conflicts of interest, signatures, numbering, storage and \u003cem\u003eper capsulam\u003c\/em\u003e decisions.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference minutes – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSwedish-language reference using the corresponding terminology under Swedish company law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish guidance for internal review and terminology checks.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 customer files. \u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e editable Word (.docx) and searchable A4 PDF. \u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eDesigned for an actual Board meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis product is intended for a meeting at which directors actually participate physically, digitally or in a hybrid format. It is not designed as a \u003cem\u003eper capsulam\u003c\/em\u003e template where no meeting takes place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor an actual Board meeting, the template provides structured sections for attendance, quorum, conflicts of interest, agenda, reporting, decision matters, implementation authority, dissent and signatures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eWho calls the Board meeting?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder Chapter 8, Section 18 of the Swedish Companies Act, the Board chair must ensure that meetings are held when necessary. The Board must also be convened if a director or the managing director requests it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf a director cannot attend and a deputy director is to step in, the deputy must be given the opportunity to do so under the applicable rules.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eQuorum – more than half of the full Board\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px;border:1px solid #e4cf91;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9e6\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo not assess quorum only by counting the people who happen to attend.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eThe Board is normally quorate when more than half of the total number of directors is present, unless the Articles of Association require a higher number. A director who is disqualified by conflict of interest for the matter is treated as not present when quorum is assessed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA decision should also not be taken unless, as far as possible, all directors have had the opportunity to participate in dealing with the matter and have received adequate information for deciding it. The template therefore includes an attendance\/quorum section rather than a simple list of names.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eMajority requirements\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnless the Articles of Association prescribe another majority, a Board decision is the view supported by \u003cstrong\u003emore than half of the directors present\u003c\/strong\u003e. If the votes are equal, the chair has the casting vote.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the full Board is not present, those voting in favour must additionally constitute more than one third of the total number of directors, unless the Articles of Association provide otherwise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eConflicts of interest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChapter 8, Section 23 contains conflict-of-interest rules for directors, including certain agreements between the director and the company, agreements where the director has a substantial interest that may conflict with the company's interest, and certain agreements with legal persons represented by the director.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe law contains specific exceptions, so the template does not treat every connection as automatic disqualification. It provides a clear place to record that a director did not participate in a particular item where the statutory conflict rules apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eWhat must Board minutes contain?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eChapter 8, Section 24 requires minutes to be kept at Board meetings and requires the Board's decisions to be recorded. The law does not require the minutes to reproduce every discussion word-for-word.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor practical evidentiary and governance purposes, the template also records:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecompany name and registration number,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003emeeting number, date, time and meeting format,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003edirectors and other participants,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003equorum and conflicts of interest,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe matters considered,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe exact resolutions adopted,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003evoting outcome or dissent where relevant,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eauthority granted to implement resolutions, if actually decided.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eCorrect signing and verification\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe statutory signing structure is more precise than simply saying that “the chair signs the minutes”.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eminute-taker signs\u003c\/strong\u003e the minutes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIf the chair did not keep the minutes, the \u003cstrong\u003echair verifies\u003c\/strong\u003e them.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIf the Board consists of more than one director, a \u003cstrong\u003edirector appointed by the Board\u003c\/strong\u003e must also verify the minutes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template contains separate fields for all three roles so they can be adapted to the actual circumstances.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eDissenting opinions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDirectors and the managing director have the right to have a dissenting opinion entered in the minutes. The template therefore includes a dedicated place to document dissent when requested.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eOne-shareholder companies\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf the company has only one shareholder, Chapter 8, Section 25 contains a special rule for agreements between the shareholder and the company. Agreements other than ordinary-course transactions on customary terms must be recorded in or appended to the Board minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eNumbering and storage\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBoard minutes must be kept in numerical order and stored securely. The new template therefore includes a meeting-number field and is designed so referenced appendices can be retained together with the relevant minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003e\n\u003cem\u003ePer capsulam\u003c\/em\u003e is a different decision method\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA \u003cem\u003eper capsulam\u003c\/em\u003e Board decision means that the directors do not meet physically or digitally. Bolagsverket emphasises that the documentation should not contain contradictory meeting language if no meeting actually took place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor registrable \u003cem\u003eper capsulam\u003c\/em\u003e Board decisions, Bolagsverket states that the record should show the date of the decision, the participating directors and the decisions, and should be signed by all directors. This product is therefore deliberately marketed as a \u003cstrong\u003eBoard meeting minutes template\u003c\/strong\u003e, not a generic template for every form of Board decision.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eTypical uses\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRegular Board meeting and business review.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBudget, financing or investment decisions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAppointment or change of managing director where appropriate.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDecisions about authorised company signatories.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCommercial contracts or projects requiring a Board resolution.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFollow-up of risks, liquidity, operations and previous decisions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eWhen a more specialised template or legal review is appropriate\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eNew share issue, warrants or convertibles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCapital deficiency and control-balance-sheet matters.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMerger, demerger, liquidation or major restructuring.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eComplex related-party or conflict-of-interest transactions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eListed\/public-company special requirements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cem\u003ePer capsulam\u003c\/em\u003e resolutions intended for registration.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTransactions subject to special majority, valuation, statement or filing requirements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eEnglish main version with Swedish reference\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary customer version for this product. The Swedish documents are included as a terminology and legal-reference aid. All documents are based on Swedish law; the package is not represented as a UK, US or universal international Board-minutes template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eRelated template\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/protokoll-for-styrelsemote-aktiebolag-mall\"\u003eProtokoll för Styrelsemöte – Swedish-first version\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3 class=\"h3\"\u003eHow many directors must attend?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAs a general rule, more than half of the full number of directors must be present, unless the Articles of Association require a higher number. A conflicted director is treated as absent for the affected matter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3 class=\"h3\"\u003eWhat majority is normally required?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNormally more than half of the directors present must support the decision. The chair has the casting vote when votes are equal. The additional one-third rule applies when the full Board is not present, unless the Articles provide otherwise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3 class=\"h3\"\u003eDoes every discussion need to be written in the minutes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The statutory core is that the Board's decisions are recorded. Material background can be included where useful, but the minutes do not need to be a transcript.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3 class=\"h3\"\u003eWho signs the minutes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe minute-taker signs. The chair verifies the minutes if the chair did not take them. Where the Board has more than one director, another director appointed by the Board also verifies them.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3 class=\"h3\"\u003eCan a director have a dissenting opinion recorded?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A director and the managing director are entitled to have a dissenting opinion entered in the minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3 class=\"h3\"\u003eCan this template be used for \u003cem\u003eper capsulam\u003c\/em\u003e?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot without significant adaptation. \u003cem\u003ePer capsulam\u003c\/em\u003e is a different method of decision-making and Bolagsverket has separate practical expectations for documentation used in registration matters.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2 class=\"h2\"\u003eOfficial legal basis\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/aktiebolagslag-2005551_sfs-2005-551\/\"\u003eSwedish Companies Act (2005:551)\u003c\/a\u003e, Chapter 8, especially Sections 18-26. Practical guidance: \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/bolagsverket.se\/foretag\/aktiebolag\/drivaaktiebolag\/tabeslutiaktiebolaget\/styrelsemote.549.html\"\u003eBolagsverket – Styrelsemöte\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/bolagsverket.se\/foretag\/aktiebolag\/drivaaktiebolag\/tabeslutiaktiebolaget\/tabeslututanatttraffaspercapsulam.5855.html\"\u003eBolagsverket – \u003cem\u003eper capsulam\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003csmall\u003eGeneral document support under Swedish law. Legal framework checked against official sources on 8 October 2026. The template does not guarantee that a particular resolution is valid and does not replace case-specific legal advice.\u003c\/small\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48240727851350,"sku":"7350139913065","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/protokoll-styrelsemote-engelska-hero-2027.png?v=1791412136"},{"product_id":"protokoll-arsstamma-aktiebolag-mall","title":"Annual General Meeting Minutes Template – Swedish Limited Company","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMinutes of the Annual General Meeting for limited liability companies – Swedish Word and PDF template according to Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e for Swedish limited liability companies wanting to document the Annual General Meeting (AGM) clearly and in a structured manner. The package includes a main Swedish template, a Swedish user guide, an English reference, and an English guide – all in DOCX and PDF format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e4ea;border-radius:12px;background:#f5f8fa\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegal framework verified: October 7, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eDesigned based on Chapter 7 of the Swedish Companies Act (2005:551) in its current wording and the Swedish Companies Registration Office's guidance on general meetings, meeting minutes, and fully digital general meetings. The template is a general documentation aid and must be adapted to the articles of association, the notice of the meeting, the share register, the company's auditor status, and the decisions actually made.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eIncluded in the package\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish AGM minutes – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eMain template with company details, voting list, mandatory AGM decisions, elections, signatures, and check-points.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish User Guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guide regarding the AGM, voting list, agenda, auditor options, signing, and post-meeting procedures.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish reference version for a Swedish limited liability company, governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance on the same Swedish legal framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTotal of 8 customer files.\u003c\/strong\u003e The Word files are editable and the PDF versions are searchable A4 documents. The product is delivered digitally.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat are AGM minutes?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Annual General Meeting is the ordinary general meeting where shareholders address the key issues required by the Companies Act each year. Minutes shall document the decisions actually made and include the information required by law, such as the voting list, date and place, or a fully digital meeting, as well as votes and signatures.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe AGM must be held within six months\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to Chapter 7, Section 10 of the Companies Act, the AGM must be held within six months of the end of the financial year. The board of directors shall then present the annual report and, where the company has an auditor, the auditor's report. Group-related and sustainability-related documents are presented when the respective rules are applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eImportant legal precision: the annual report is presented – the meeting adopts the accounts\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px;border:1px solid #e4cf91;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9e6\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDo not just write that \"the annual report was approved.\"\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eAt the AGM, decisions are normally made regarding the adoption of the income statement and balance sheet, the appropriation of the company's profit or loss in accordance with the adopted balance sheet, and discharge from liability for the members of the board of directors and the managing director, when applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eDecisions covered by the template\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eElection of meeting chairman.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePreparation and approval of the voting list.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eElection of minute-checkers or documentation of the legal exception when all shares are represented in a certain way.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVerification that the meeting was duly convened.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eApproval of the agenda.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ePresentation of the annual report and other applicable documents.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAdoption of the income statement and balance sheet.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAppropriation of the company’s profit\/loss.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDischarge from liability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eComposition of the board and board fees.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eElection of the board and, where applicable, auditor and auditor fees.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOther business items included in the notice of the meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVoting list as a ready-made attachment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package contains a voting list with fields for shareholders, personal\/corporate ID number, proxy or power of attorney, number of shares, and number of votes. According to Chapter 7, Section 29, the voting list shall specify the shareholders, proxies, and assistants present, as well as how many shares and votes each shareholder and proxy represents.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe voting list shall be approved by the meeting and included in the minutes or added as an attachment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat the minutes must show\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAccording to Chapter 7, Section 48, the minutes must, among other things, specify:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe date and place of the general meeting – or that the meeting was held entirely digitally,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ewhich decisions the meeting made,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ein case of a vote: which proposals were made and the outcome of the vote,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe voting list, directly in the minutes or as an attachment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Companies Registration Office also recommends clear identification of the company and corporate registration number, meeting chairman, any minute-checkers, and how the notice was handled when not all shares are represented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSignatures and verification\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is not correct to always describe the minutes as a document that simply should be \"signed by the meeting chairman and minute-checkers.\" The order of the law is more precise:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe secretary of the meeting signs the minutes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ethe chairman verifies the minutes if the chairman did not record them,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003enormally, at least one minute-checker appointed by the meeting verifies the minutes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ea separate minute-checker does not need to be appointed if the chairman or the secretary alone, or the two together, represent all shares in the company.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template has signature fields that can be adapted to whoever actually served as secretary and chairman.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompanies without an auditor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can also be used when a private limited company legally lacks an auditor. In that case, irrelevant options regarding the auditor's report, appointment of auditor, and auditor fees should be removed. Do not leave standard text that gives the impression that an auditor's report was presented when none exists.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePhysical, hybrid, or fully digital general meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe main template contains options for a physical, hybrid, and fully digital meeting. In the case of a fully digital general meeting, the minutes must expressly state that the meeting was held entirely digitally. The guidance of the Swedish Companies Registration Office also emphasizes that the notice needs to contain sufficient information on how shareholders are to participate and vote digitally.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePer capsulam is something else\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIn a per capsulam procedure, the shareholders do not meet physically or digitally. Instead, a decision or minute is circulated for the signature of all shareholders. This product is built for an actual Annual General Meeting and should not be used mechanically as a per capsulam template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe agenda cannot be renumbered at the meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe proposed agenda attached to the notice of the meeting shall be submitted for approval by the general meeting. The Companies Act states that the numbering of the items may not be changed. The template therefore documents the approval of the sent-out agenda.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAfter the meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFinalize, sign, and verify the minutes according to the actual distribution of roles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eKeep the minutes available at the company for shareholders no later than two weeks after the meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eProvide a copy to shareholders who request it and provide a postal address.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eStore the minutes securely.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCheck which decisions need to be reported to the Swedish Companies Registration Office, for example, certain changes to the board, auditor, or articles of association.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eHandle the submission of the annual report separately; the AGM minutes do not replace the annual report.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen a specific legal assessment is wise\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eListed or public limited company.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSpecial dividend or other capital measure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAmendment of the articles of association.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIssue, reduction of share capital, or redemption.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMerger, division, cross-border procedure, or liquidation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDispute regarding notice, voting rights, power of attorney, conflict of interest, or discharge from liability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDecisions with specific majority requirements or a need for more detailed voting records.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English reference version follows the same structure and is explicitly governed by Swedish law. It is intended as a language and communication aid and should not be treated as a British, American, or general international general meeting template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated template\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/protokoll-arsstamma-aktiebolag-engelska-mall\"\u003eAnnual General Meeting Minutes – English-first version\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust all Swedish limited companies hold an AGM?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The ordinary Annual General Meeting must be held within six months after the end of the financial year.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the minutes have a voting list?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The voting list must be included in the minutes or added as an attachment and approved by the meeting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the AGM minutes have a minute-checker?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNormally, at least one minute-checker is appointed by the meeting. However, there is a statutory exception when the chairman or the secretary alone, or the two together, represent all shares.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the meeting be held fully digitally?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, if the conditions in the Companies Act and the articles of association are met. The minutes must then state that the meeting was held fully digitally.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the same template be used for an extraordinary general meeting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot without extensive adaptation. This product contains the specific issues that belong to an AGM and should not be marketed as a general template for extraordinary meetings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the minutes be sent to the Swedish Companies Registration Office every year?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot generally as a substitute for the annual report. However, certain decisions and registration matters may require minutes or excerpts from the minutes as an attachment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLegal references\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/aktiebolagslag-2005551_sfs-2005-551\/\"\u003eThe Swedish Companies Act (2005:551)\u003c\/a\u003e, especially Chapter 7, Sections 10–11, 29–31, and 48–49. See also the Swedish Companies Registration Office's guidance on general meetings, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/bolagsverket.se\/foretag\/aktiebolag\/drivaaktiebolag\/tabeslutiaktiebolaget\/bolagsstamma\/skrivaprotokollpabolagsstamman.561.html\"\u003emeeting minutes\u003c\/a\u003e, and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/bolagsverket.se\/foretag\/aktiebolag\/drivaaktiebolag\/tabeslutiaktiebolaget\/bolagsstamma\/digitalbolagsstamma.5364.html\"\u003edigital general meeting\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003csmall\u003eGeneral documentation aid according to Swedish law. Legal framework verified against official sources on October 7, 2026. The template does not guarantee that a specific meeting or decision is valid and does not replace individual corporate legal advice.\u003c\/small\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48240785260886,"sku":"7350139913072","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/protokoll-arsstamma-aktiebolag-hero-2027.png?v=1791411123"},{"product_id":"protokoll-arsstamma-aktiebolag-engelska-mall","title":"Annual General Meeting Minutes Template (English) – Swedish Limited Company","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAnnual General Meeting Minutes for a Swedish Limited Company (AB)\u003c\/strong\u003e – an English-first minutes template for documenting the annual general meeting of a Swedish aktiebolag under Swedish company law. The package includes an editable English main version, an English user guide, a Swedish reference version and a Swedish user guide – each in DOCX and PDF.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e4ea;border-radius:12px;background:#f5f8fa\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegal framework checked: 7 October 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003ePrepared with reference to Chapter 7 of the Swedish Companies Act (2005:551) and current guidance from the Swedish Companies Registration Office (Bolagsverket). The template provides general company-law documentation support and must be adapted to the company's Articles of Association, notice, share register, auditor status and actual resolutions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish AGM minutes – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish main version with meeting details, voting list, statutory annual resolutions, elections, signatures and drafting checks.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish user guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance on the annual meeting, voting list, agenda, signatures, auditor alternatives and post-meeting handling.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference minutes – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eCorresponding Swedish-language reference version using Swedish company-law terminology.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish reference guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSwedish guidance for internal review and terminology checks.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eTotal:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 customer files. \u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e editable Word (.docx) and searchable A4 PDF. \u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download only.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFor which companies is the template intended?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is primarily intended for a Swedish limited company (aktiebolag) holding an ordinary annual general meeting. It is particularly useful when the meeting documentation needs to be in English but the company is governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe standard package is suitable for many private\/unlisted Swedish companies. Listed public companies, special corporate actions and unusual shareholder situations may require additional minutes content, majority requirements or filing documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe annual general meeting must be held within six months\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder the Swedish Companies Act, the ordinary general meeting at which the annual accounts are presented must be held within six months after the end of the financial year. The board presents the annual report and, where the company has an auditor, the auditor's report. Group and sustainability-related documents are also presented when the relevant rules apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eImportant correction: the meeting does not merely “approve the annual report”\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px;border:1px solid #e4cf91;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9e6\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe statutory resolutions are more specific.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eAt the annual general meeting, shareholders normally resolve on the adoption of the income statement and balance sheet, the allocation of profit or loss according to the adopted balance sheet, and discharge from liability towards the company for directors and the managing director where applicable. The annual report itself is presented to the meeting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eKey annual resolutions included in the template\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAdoption of the income statement and balance sheet.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eWhere applicable, adoption of the consolidated income statement and consolidated balance sheet.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAllocation of profit or loss according to the adopted balance sheet.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDischarge from liability towards the company for board members and the managing director, where applicable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBoard composition and remuneration.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eElection or re-election of directors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eElection of an auditor and auditor remuneration where applicable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOther matters properly included in the notice and capable of resolution at the meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVoting list included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe package contains a voting-list appendix with fields for shareholders, personal\/organisation numbers, representatives or proxies, number of shares and number of votes. The voting list should reflect shareholders, proxies and assistants present or otherwise deemed present under the applicable rules, and the general meeting must approve it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe voting list must be included in the minutes or attached as an appendix. If the meeting is continued to a later date in circumstances requiring a new voting list, the template should be adapted accordingly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat must the minutes record?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Swedish Companies Act requires the minutes to record the day and place of the general meeting, or that the meeting was held entirely digitally, together with the resolutions adopted. If a resolution was decided through a formal vote, the proposals and the outcome of the vote must be recorded. The voting list must form part of the minutes or be attached.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eBolagsverket additionally recommends clear identification of the company and registration number, the chair, any verifier(s), approval of the voting list, and sufficient information about notice where not all shares are represented.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eChair, minute-taker and verifier\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe chair is responsible for ensuring that minutes are kept. The minute-taker signs the minutes. If the chair did not take the minutes, the chair verifies them, and at least one verifier appointed by the general meeting normally also verifies the minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA separate verifier does not have to be appointed if the chair or the minute-taker alone, or the two together, represent all shares in the company. The template contains an optional wording for this statutory exception.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePhysical, hybrid and fully digital meetings\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe meeting-details section contains alternatives for physical, hybrid and fully digital meetings. If the meeting is held entirely digitally, the minutes should expressly state this. The notice for a fully digital meeting must also satisfy the applicable participation and voting-information requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA \u003cem\u003eper capsulam\u003c\/em\u003e decision is different: shareholders do not meet physically or digitally but instead circulate a written resolution\/minutes document for signature by all shareholders. This product is designed for an actual annual general meeting, not as a per capsulam template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCompanies without an auditor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is designed to work both for companies with and without an auditor. If the company validly has no auditor, delete the alternatives relating to the auditor's report, auditor election and auditor remuneration that do not apply. Do not leave wording suggesting that an auditor's report was presented if no such report exists.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNotice and agenda\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template includes a specific resolution on whether the meeting was duly convened. This text should only be used after checking how notice was actually issued against the Articles of Association and Chapter 7 of the Swedish Companies Act.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe proposed agenda attached to the notice is presented to the meeting for approval. Under the Companies Act, the numbering of the agenda items may not be changed. The minutes therefore record approval of the agenda rather than creating a new agenda after the meeting has begun.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAfter the annual general meeting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFinalise, sign and verify the minutes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMake the minutes available at the company to shareholders no later than two weeks after the meeting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eProvide a copy to a requesting shareholder who provides a postal address.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eStore the minutes securely.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIdentify which resolutions require notification or filing with Bolagsverket, for example certain changes to directors, auditor, Articles of Association or other registered information.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eHandle the annual report filing separately; the AGM minutes do not replace the filing of the annual report.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen extra legal review is advisable\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eListed or public company requirements apply.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe meeting will decide a non-routine dividend, share issue, capital reduction or redemption.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe Articles of Association will be amended.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe company is considering merger, demerger, liquidation or a cross-border procedure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThere is a dispute about notice, voting rights, proxies, conflicts of interest or discharge from liability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe company needs to record a special majority, individual voting results or complex shareholder reservations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish main version with Swedish reference\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English document is the primary version in this product. The Swedish documents are included as a terminology and legal-reference aid. The package is governed by Swedish law and should not be treated as a UK, US or universal international corporate-minutes template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated template\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/protokoll-arsstamma-aktiebolag-mall\"\u003eProtokoll Årsstämma Aktiebolag – Swedish-first version\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes every Swedish limited company need an annual general meeting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A Swedish limited company must hold the annual ordinary general meeting within six months after the end of the financial year.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the minutes include a voting list?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The voting list must be included in the minutes or attached as an appendix, and the general meeting approves it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo the minutes need a verifier?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNormally at least one verifier appointed by the meeting is required in addition to the applicable chair\/minute-taker signatures. However, there is a statutory exception when the chair or minute-taker alone, or the two together, represent all shares.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the annual general meeting be fully digital?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes, where the legal and Articles-of-Association requirements are met. If the meeting is entirely digital, the minutes must state this.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs this the same as a board meeting minute?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The annual general meeting is a shareholders' meeting under Chapter 7 of the Swedish Companies Act. Board meetings follow separate rules under Chapter 8.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo we send the completed AGM minutes to Bolagsverket every year?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNot as a general substitute for the annual report filing. Some specific resolutions or registration matters require minutes or extracts as supporting documents. The filing need depends on the resolution concerned.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eOfficial legal basis\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/aktiebolagslag-2005551_sfs-2005-551\/\"\u003eSwedish Companies Act (2005:551)\u003c\/a\u003e, Chapter 7, especially Sections 10-11, 29-31 and 48-49, together with current Bolagsverket guidance on general meetings, minutes and fully digital meetings.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003csmall\u003eGeneral document support under Swedish law. Reviewed against official sources on 7 October 2026. The template does not guarantee the validity of a particular meeting or resolution and does not replace case-specific legal advice.\u003c\/small\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48240802660694,"sku":"7350139913089","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/protokoll-arsstamma-engelska-hero-2027.png?v=1791409663"},{"product_id":"sekretessavtal-nda-mall","title":"Non-Disclosure Agreement (NDA) – Swedish Word\/PDF + English reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNon-Disclosure Agreement (NDA) – Swedish master template under Swedish law\u003c\/strong\u003e for companies and organizations that need to share sensitive information in connection with, for example, partnerships, procurement, due diligence, product development, or business negotiations. The package includes the Swedish master version, a Swedish user guide, an English reference version, and an English guide – all in both Word and PDF formats.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px 18px;border:1px solid #d9e4ea;border-radius:12px;background:#f5f8fa\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally reviewed: October 7, 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eDesigned based on the Swedish Trade Secrets Act (2018:558), including amendments up to SFS 2025:1281, the Contracts Act, the Whistleblowing Act, and relevant GDPR regulations. The template is intended for mutual business confidentiality between organizations and does not replace individual legal advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat's included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish Mutual Non-Disclosure Agreement – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e13 sections covering purpose, confidential information, exceptions, security, mandatory disclosure, incidents, return\/deletion, liability, and signatures.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish User Guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eStep-by-step guidance on parties, purpose, types of information, agreement term, trade secrets, GDPR, and penalties.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish reference – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eEnglish reference version governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eEnglish guidance on the same Swedish legal framework.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eA total of 8 customer files.\u003c\/strong\u003e The Word versions are editable and the PDF versions are searchable A4 documents. The product is delivered digitally.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is a mutual non-disclosure agreement?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a \u003cstrong\u003emutual NDA\u003c\/strong\u003e, meaning both parties can be both the disclosing and receiving party. Each party commits to protecting the other party's confidential information and using it only for the expressly stated purpose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template is therefore particularly suitable for situations where two companies exchange information during a project, a potential business deal, supplier assessment, investment, due diligence, or technical collaboration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat can be subject to confidentiality?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eExamples of data that may be covered include:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ebusiness plans, calculations, forecasts, margins, and non-public pricing,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003ecustomer and supplier information,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eproduct plans, drawings, specifications, and prototypes,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003esoftware, source code, and technical documentation,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eunpublished research, development, and strategies,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003enon-public negotiations regarding the relevant business purpose.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template covers both information explicitly marked as confidential and information that, based on its content and circumstances, should reasonably be understood as confidential.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNot all confidential information is automatically a trade secret\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe Trade Secrets Act (2018:558) sets specific requirements for what constitutes a statutory trade secret. The information must, among other things, concern business or operational conditions, not be generally known or easily accessible, have been subject to reasonable secrecy measures, and be such that disclosure would likely cause competitive harm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn NDA can simultaneously provide contractual protection for information even when it does not meet all the legal criteria for a trade secret. This distinction is explicitly stated in the new template.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eImportant limitation: crimes and serious misconduct\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px;border:1px solid #e4cf91;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9e6\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eThe non-disclosure agreement may not be used to prevent legal reporting.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eInformation about crimes or other serious misconduct does not become a trade secret simply by being marked confidential. The template therefore preserves the right to protected whistleblowing, mandatory disclosure to authorities, and other mandatory legal rights.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eGDPR – an NDA is not the same as a data processing agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAn NDA limits how confidential information may be used and shared. However, it does not in itself create a legal basis for the processing of personal data and does not replace a data processing agreement (DPA) under Article 28 of the GDPR.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf one party processes personal data on behalf of the other party, the roles must be analyzed separately and a proper data processing agreement may be required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eConfidentiality is not automatically a non-compete clause\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA non-disclosure agreement limits the unauthorized use and disclosure of certain information. It does not automatically prohibit a party from working for a competitor, starting a competing business, or engaging in lawful competition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNon-compete clauses are a different type of restriction and are covered by, among other things, Section 38 of the Contracts Act. Unreasonable contract terms may also be adjusted or disregarded according to Section 36.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eAgreement term and continued confidentiality\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe standard version contains editable starting points of a \u003cstrong\u003e12-month agreement term\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e3 years of confidentiality from the most recent relevant disclosure\u003c\/strong\u003e. These are contractual proposals – not statutory deadlines and no guarantee of enforceability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor information that actually constitutes a statutory trade secret, the template also states that the confidentiality obligation may persist as long as the information retains that status and the limitation is consistent with applicable law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003ePenalties for breach\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe template does not automatically promise damages, injunctions, or compensation for all costs. The consequences of a breach depend on the agreement, which information was affected, the degree of negligence or intent, and which legal rules are applicable.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor certain attacks on trade secrets, the Trade Secrets Act may provide the right to damages and injunctions. The new template therefore distinguishes between breach of contract and statutory remedies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eReturn and deletion\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eWhen the purpose has ended or upon written request, the recipient shall, according to the standard text, return or delete reasonably accessible confidential material within an editable deadline. Exceptions exist for material that must be preserved by law, documented compliance requirements, and standard inaccessible backups.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen is the template suitable?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTwo companies want to discuss a potential partnership.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBoth parties will disclose sensitive information.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eA company and a supplier need to exchange commercial or technical data.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe parties are conducting due diligence or negotiations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eYou need a Swedish master version but also an English reference.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen should you use another or a more individual agreement?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOnly one party is to disclose information – a unilateral NDA may be more appropriate.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe agreement is to be used primarily against an employee.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eYou need non-compete clauses, non-solicitation clauses, exclusivity, or far-reaching IP rules.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eYou need a separate GDPR data processing agreement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eThe relationship is international and foreign mandatory law or other dispute resolution is to be applied.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eYou want to use specific liquidated damages, arbitration, or customized security requirements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to use the template\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFill in the full company names, organization numbers, and authorized signatories.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDefine a concrete business purpose.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCustomize which categories of information are to be covered.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDecide which employees, advisors, and contractors may have access to the information.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eCheck the agreement term, confidentiality period, and deadline for return\/deletion.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAssess GDPR and any separate data processing regulations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRemove all editing instructions and placeholders before signing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEnsure signatory rights and save signed copies.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u0026gt;\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEnglish reference included\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe English version follows the same basic structure and is expressly governed by Swedish law. It is included for internal review or communication with English-speaking parties, but is not marketed as a British, American, or universal international NDA.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/sekretessavtal-engelska\"\u003eMutual Non-Disclosure Agreement – English-first sister product\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs this a unilateral or mutual NDA?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is mutual. Both parties can disclose and receive confidential information.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eMust the non-disclosure agreement be witnessed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThere is generally no specific legal requirement for witnesses for an ordinary business NDA. Evidence of identity, authorization, and the content of the agreement is, however, important.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the NDA be signed electronically?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor an ordinary business NDA, there is generally no specific formal requirement that excludes electronic signing. However, ensure identity, signatory rights, and a reliable audit trail.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the agreement make all information trade secrets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The law's criteria for a trade secret are assessed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the agreement stop whistleblowing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The template contains explicit exceptions for protected reporting, statutory obligations, and reporting of crimes or serious misconduct.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo we also need a GDPR agreement?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIf one party is a data processor for the other, a separate data processing agreement under Article 28 of the GDPR may be required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs there an automatic liquidated damages clause?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The standard version does not contain a fixed automatic liquidated damages clause. Such terms should be adapted based on the relationship, risk, and proportionality.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLegal references\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/lag-2018558-om-foretagshemligheter_sfs-2018-558\/\"\u003eTrade Secrets Act (2018:558)\u003c\/a\u003e, as amended up to SFS 2025:1281; \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/lag-1915218-om-avtal-och-andra-rattshandlingar_sfs-1915-218\/\"\u003eContracts Act (1915:218)\u003c\/a\u003e, particularly Sections 36 and 38; the Act (2021:890) on the protection of persons reporting misconduct; GDPR and the Swedish Authority for Privacy Protection (IMY) guidance on data processing agreements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003csmall\u003eGeneral documentation support based on Swedish law, reviewed October 7, 2026. The template does not replace individual legal advice and does not guarantee a specific legal or financial outcome.\u003c\/small\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48241009590614,"sku":"7350139913096","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/sekretessavtal-nda-svenska-hero-2027.png?v=1791407677"},{"product_id":"sekretessavtal-engelska","title":"Mutual Non-Disclosure Agreement (NDA) – Swedish Law | English Word\/PDF + Swedish reference + guide","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-nda-product\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMall för ömsesidigt sekretessavtal (NDA) styrt av svensk rätt\u003c\/strong\u003e – ett sekretessavtal på engelska för företag och andra affärsparter som önskar dela kommersiellt känslig information med varandra under utvärdering av ett projekt, en transaktion, ett tilltänkt partnerskap eller liknande affärsmöjlighet. Detta paket innehåller ett redigerbart engelskt huvudavtal, en engelsk användarhandbok, ett svenskt referensavtal och en svensk referenshandbok – samtliga i formaten DOCX och PDF.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px;border:1px solid #d9e4ea;border-radius:12px;background:#f5f8fa\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eRättslig ram granskad: 7 oktober 2026\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:6px 0 0\"\u003eDenna mall är utformad med hänvisning till lag (2018:558) om företagshemligheter, inklusive ändringar i SFS 2025:1281, avtalslagen, visselblåsarlagstiftning och tillämpliga GDPR-regler. Det är ett allmänt affärsdokument för svensk rätt, inte ett brittiskt\/amerikanskt eller universellt internationellt sekretessavtal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVad ingår i 2027 års dokumentpaket?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse;margin:14px 0 24px\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEngelskt ömsesidigt NDA – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eRedigerbart avtal i 13 delar, inklusive signaturfält och valbar bilaga för konfidentiell information.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEngelsk användarhandbok – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eSteg-för-steg-instruktioner om parter, syfte, sekretess, undantag, löptid, skydd av information och undertecknande.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvenskt referensavtal – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5e7eb\"\u003eMotsvarande referens på svenska som använder begrepp från svensk avtalsrätt och lag om företagshemligheter.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSvensk referenshandbok – DOCX + PDF\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:10px\"\u003eSamma vägledning på svenska för att underlätta terminologi och praktisk ifyllnad.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eAntal filer:\u003c\/strong\u003e 8 kundfiler. \u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e Word (.docx) och sökbar PDF i A4-format. \u003cstrong\u003eLeverans:\u003c\/strong\u003e Digital nedladdning; ingen fysisk produkt skickas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVad är ett ömsesidigt sekretessavtal?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEtt ömsesidigt sekretessavtal (Mutual NDA) är ett sekretessavtal där \u003cstrong\u003ebåda parter kan lämna ut och ta emot information\u003c\/strong\u003e. Varje part förbinder sig att skydda konfidentiell information som mottagits från den andra parten och att inte använda den för obehöriga syften. Ömsesidiga avtal är ofta användbara vid leverantörsutvärderingar, gemensam produktutveckling, affärsdiskussioner, due diligence och kommersiella förhandlingar.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDetta är ett \u003cstrong\u003etvåvägs B2B-sekretessavtal\u003c\/strong\u003e. Om endast ett företag kommer att lämna ut information medan det andra endast tar emot den, kan ett separat enkelriktat sekretessavtal vara lämpligare än denna ömsesidiga mall. Denna åtskillnad anges uttryckligen i dokumentet och dess användarhandbok.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eInformation som kan skyddas\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDet redigerbara avtalet tillåter parterna att definiera icke-publik konfidentiell affärsinformation såsom:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAffärsplaner, prognoser, budgetar, vinstmarginaler och icke-publik prissättning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eKundrelationer, leverantörsavtal och kommersiella strategier.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eProgramkällkod, produktdesign, specifikationer, formler och teknisk dokumentation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOpublicerad forskning, produktöversikter, prototyper och interna operativa processer.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIcke-publika förhandlingar och annan information som rimligen kräver sekretess.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDet omfattar information som markerats som konfidentiell samt information som rimligen bör förstås vara konfidentiell i sitt sammanhang. Parterna kan lägga till specifika kategorier i en valbar bilaga.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eViktiga klausuler i mallen\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSyftesbegränsning:\u003c\/strong\u003e Information får endast användas för ett angivet projekt eller en angiven transaktion.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eStandardundantag:\u003c\/strong\u003e Offentlig information, information som är legitimt känd, lagstadgat utlämnande till tredje part och självständig utveckling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eRimlig säkerhet och \"need-to-know\"-åtkomst:\u003c\/strong\u003e Skydd genom tillåten personal, rådgivare och konsulter som omfattas av lämpliga sekretessförpliktelser.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLagstadgade utlämnanden:\u003c\/strong\u003e Avtalet tillåter utlämnanden som krävs enligt lag eller bindande myndighetsbeslut.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eSkyddad rapportering:\u003c\/strong\u003e Uttryckligt bevarande av lagstadgat skydd för visselblåsning och rapportering av brott eller allvarliga oegentligheter.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncidenthantering:\u003c\/strong\u003e Skyndsamt meddelande och rimliga åtgärder efter obehörigt utlämnande eller väsentlig förlust, i enlighet med lag.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eÅterlämnande och radering:\u003c\/strong\u003e Hantering av kopior och rimliga undantag för tvingande lagring och säkerhetskopior.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eImmateriella rättigheter:\u003c\/strong\u003e Ingen automatisk övergång av äganderätt, licens eller skyldighet att slutföra en transaktion.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eLöptid och fortsatta förpliktelser:\u003c\/strong\u003e Redigerbar löptid och bestämmelser om avtalets giltighet, med specifik hantering av lagstadgade företagshemligheter.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnsvar och svensk rätt:\u003c\/strong\u003e Påföljder enligt tillämplig lag; ingen utfästelse om garanti för skadestånd eller automatiskt vitesföreläggande.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSvenska företagshemligheter – när gäller lagstadgat skydd?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLag (2018:558) om företagshemligheter skyddar viss icke-publik affärsinformation när de lagstadgade kriterierna är uppfyllda. Dessa kriterier inkluderar informationens kommersiella sammanhang, att den inte är allmänt känd, att rimliga åtgärder vidtagits för att hålla den hemlig samt den potentiella skada som ett röjande kan orsaka. Att enbart skriva \u003cem\u003e\"konfidentiellt\"\u003c\/em\u003e förvandlar inte automatiskt varje dokument till en lagstadgad företagshemlighet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEtt sekretessavtal kan även ge avtalsrättsligt skydd åt information som inte kvalificerar som en företagshemlighet, beroende på avtalet och tillämpliga regler. 2027 års paket tydliggör denna distinktion. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/lag-2018558-om-foretagshemligheter_sfs-2018-558\/\"\u003eLäs lag om företagshemligheter på riksdagens webbplats.\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEtt sekretessavtal får inte förhindra skyddad visselblåsning\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAvtalet tillåter uttryckligen utlämnanden som krävs enligt lag och bevarar laglig rapportering till myndigheter, skyddad visselblåsning och rapportering av allvarliga oegentligheter. Lagen om företagshemligheter klassificerar inte information om brott eller andra allvarliga oegentligheter som en företagshemlighet, och separat lagstiftning skyddar behöriga visselblåsare.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSekretessavtalet får inte användas för att kringgå tvingande lagliga rättigheter eller skyldigheter. Detta är viktigt när kommersiellt känslig information överlappar med regulatoriska frågor eller påstådda missförhållanden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLöptid: 12 månader och tre år är redigerbara exempel\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDen redigerbara standardversionen börjar med en \u003cstrong\u003eavtalsperiod på 12 månader\u003c\/strong\u003e och en \u003cstrong\u003esekretessperiod på tre år efter det sista relevanta utlämnandet\u003c\/strong\u003e. Dessa är utkaststandarder, inte lagstadgade maximier, minimier eller garantier för verkställbarhet. Lämpliga villkor beror på informationen, parterna och det kommersiella sammanhanget.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eAvtalet föreskriver separat att information som kvalificerar som en svensk lagstadgad företagshemlighet förblir underställd sekretess så länge den behåller denna status och restriktionerna är verkställbara. Detta bör inte missförstås som ett generellt löfte om att all information förblir konfidentiell för evigt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVad ett ömsesidigt sekretessavtal inte täcker\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"margin:18px 0;padding:16px;border:1px solid #e4cf91;border-radius:12px;background:#fff9e6\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eViktigt: Ett sekretessavtal är inte automatiskt ett konkurrensbegränsande avtal eller ett personuppgiftsbiträdesavtal enligt GDPR.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:7px 0 0\"\u003eSekretess begränsar obehörigt röjande och användning av specificerad information; det hindrar i sig inte någon från att arbeta för en konkurrent eller driva en konkurrerande verksamhet. Oskäliga villkor kan jämkas enligt 36 § avtalslagen, och konkurrensbegränsande åtaganden adresseras dessutom i 38 §.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOm ett företag behandlar personuppgifter för ett annat företags räkning kan ett separat personuppgiftsbiträdesavtal enligt GDPR artikel 28 krävas. Ett sekretessåtagande ensamt är otillräckligt. Det skapar i sig inte en laglig grund för behandling av personuppgifter. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.imy.se\/verksamhet\/dataskydd\/det-har-galler-enligt-gdpr\/personuppgiftsansvariga-och-personuppgiftsbitraden\/personuppgiftsbitradesavtal\/\"\u003eSe Integritetsskyddsmyndighetens (IMY) vägledning.\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDetta paket är inte heller anpassat för anställning, sekretess vid offentlig upphandling, klassificerad\/säkerhetskänslig information, specialiserad finansiell reglering, licensiering av immateriella rättigheter eller komplexa gränsöverskridande tvister utan vidare granskning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNär denna NDA-mall är lämplig\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTvå svenska företag utforskar ett samarbete eller en leverantörsrelation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBåda företagen kan dela finansiell eller teknisk information under förhandlingar.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEtt nystartat bolag och en tilltänkt kommersiell partner vill ha ett ömsesidigt sekretessramverk.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFöretag behöver ett sekretessavtal i Word\/PDF på engelska som styrs av svensk rätt.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eParterna vill ha en svensk referens för att underlätta intern granskning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNär individuell juridisk rådgivning kan vara lämplig\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEndast en part lämnar ut information och ett ensidigt sekretessavtal vore lämpligare.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eMottagaren är en anställd, arbetstagare eller enskild konsult inom ramen för ett separat anställningsförhållande.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eInformationen inkluderar stora datamängder med personuppgifter eller kräver ett personuppgiftsbiträdesavtal (GDPR).\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eÖvergång av immateriella rättigheter, exklusivitet, kundvärvningsförbud eller konkurrensförbud förväntas.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRelationen är gränsöverskridande och relevanta tvingande utländska lagar eller jurisdiktionsregler kan vara tillämpliga.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eParterna vill ha fasta avtalsviten, särskilda säkerhetsvillkor, skiljeklausul eller skräddarsydda påföljder.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSå här färdigställer du sekretessavtalet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eÖppna den engelska DOCX-filen och läs den engelska användarhandboken.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIdentifiera båda parter med fullständigt juridiskt namn, organisationsnummer och behörig firmatecknare.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBeskriv ett specifikt affärsmässigt \u003cstrong\u003eSyfte\u003c\/strong\u003e snarare än alla möjliga framtida aktiviteter.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eGranska definitionen av Konfidentiell Information och dess undantag.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eVälj realistiska åtgärder för utlämnande, lagring och åtkomst för rådgivare eller konsulter.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eKontrollera den redigerbara 12-månadersperioden, treåriga sekretessperioden, samt tidsramar för meddelande och återlämnande\/radering.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eBekräfta att GDPR och eventuella ytterligare konkurrensbegränsningar eller IP-arrangemang hanteras separat vid behov.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTa bort alla onödiga kommentarer och tomma platshållare, signera och spara kopior.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eEngelsk huvudversion – svensk referens\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDet engelska avtalet är det \u003cstrong\u003eprimära kunddokumentet\u003c\/strong\u003e för denna produkt. Den svenska versionen ingår som referens med motsvarande terminologi; båda är uttryckligen grundade i svensk rätt. De presenteras inte som ett universellt amerikanskt NDA, brittisk sekretesshandling eller allmänt internationellt kontrakt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelaterade mallar\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\u003cli\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/sekretessavtal-nda-mall\"\u003eSekretessavtal (NDA) – svensk huvudmall\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVanliga frågor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eÄr detta ett enkelriktat eller ömsesidigt sekretessavtal?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eDet är ömsesidigt: varje part kan både lämna ut och ta emot konfidentiell information. Om endast en part behöver skydd, överväg ett specifikt utformat enkelriktat avtal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eÄr ett engelskt sekretessavtal automatiskt giltigt i Sverige?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEtt engelskspråkigt avtal kan användas under svensk rätt, men dess verkan beror på parterna, firmateckningsrätt, avtalsformuleringar och tillämplig lag. Språk i sig garanterar inte giltighet eller verkställbarhet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBehöver sekretessavtalet vittnen eller registrering?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eEtt vanligt affärssekretessavtal under svensk rätt kräver i regel inte lagstadgade vittnen eller registrering hos myndighet. Tillförlitlig identifiering, behörighet att teckna avtal och bevis på avtalets ingående förblir dock viktigt.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKan sekretessavtalet täcka programkällkod och affärsplaner?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eJa, när informationen beskrivs korrekt och förpliktelserna är lämpliga. Avtalet ger också utrymme för att identifiera särskilt viktiga informationskategorier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eKan vi lägga till ett vite om någon bryter mot avtalet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eMöjliga vitesbestämmelser kräver noggrannhet och individuell granskning. Denna standardversion pålägger avsiktligt inte ett fast automatiskt vite eller garanterar skadestånd.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFörhindrar ett sekretessavtal någon från att rapportera missförhållanden?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNej. Lagstadgade rapporteringsrättigheter, obligatoriska utlämnanden och skyddad visselblåsning måste respekteras.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eGör avtalet oss GDPR-kompatibla?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNej. GDPR-förpliktelser, inklusive ett personuppgiftsbiträdesavtal när så krävs, måste hanteras oberoende.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003ch2\u003eJuridiska referenser\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eLag (2018:558) om företagshemligheter, med ändringar t.o.m. SFS 2025:1281; avtalslagen (1915:218), särskilt 36 och 38 §§; lag (2021:890) om skydd för personer som rapporterar om missförhållanden; GDPR och relevant vägledning från Integritetsskyddsmyndigheten (IMY).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003csmall\u003eDokumentpaket baserat på svensk rätt granskad 7 oktober 2026. Detta är generellt stöd för juridiska dokument, inte individuell juridisk rådgivning, och ingen standardmall garanterar specifika juridiska eller ekonomiska utfall.\u003c\/small\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48241020404054,"sku":"7350139913102","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/sekretessavtal-nda-engelska-hero-2027.png?v=1791338446"},{"product_id":"avtal-for-tjanster-mall","title":"Service Agreement Template – Word\/PDF","description":"\u003ch3\u003eProduct description: Agreement for services Template Word\/PDF\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003e Introduction\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e A contract for services is a legally binding document that governs the relationship between a service provider and a customer. This template is designed to facilitate the creation of such an agreement, with clear and legally correct wording that ensures both parties have a common understanding of their rights and obligations. The template is available for immediate download after purchase and comes in both Word and PDF formats, making it easy to customize and use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003e Areas of use\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e The template can be used across a range of industries, including:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e Consulting services\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e IT services\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e Marketing and PR\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e Craft services\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e Education and coaching\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e Regardless of the type of service offered, this template ensures that the agreement covers all necessary legal aspects.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003e Benefits of using this template\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegally correct:\u003c\/strong\u003e The template is designed in accordance with Swedish legislation and practice, which guarantees that the agreement is legally binding and protects the interests of both parties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eCustomizable:\u003c\/strong\u003e With formats in both Word and PDF, the agreement can be easily edited to suit specific needs and requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eTime-efficient:\u003c\/strong\u003e Saves time by providing a ready-made structure and wording, allowing you to focus on the business instead of drafting an agreement from scratch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eDirect Download:\u003c\/strong\u003e Available for immediate download after purchase, meaning you can quickly get started using the agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003e Content of the template\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e The template contains the following sections:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eParties and contact information:\u003c\/strong\u003e Identification of both parties and their contact details.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eDefinitions:\u003c\/strong\u003e Clarification of important terms used in the Agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eServices:\u003c\/strong\u003e Detailed description of the services to be provided.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003ePayment:\u003c\/strong\u003e Terms of payment, including amount, payment schedule and methods.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eTime and place:\u003c\/strong\u003e Time frames and place(s) for service delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eRights and obligations:\u003c\/strong\u003e The rights and obligations of the parties in connection with the service.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eConfidentiality:\u003c\/strong\u003e Provisions on confidentiality and how confidential information is to be handled.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eLimitation of liability:\u003c\/strong\u003e Limitation of the parties' liability in the event of any disputes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eTermination:\u003c\/strong\u003e Conditions for how the agreement can be terminated by either party.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eOther provisions:\u003c\/strong\u003e Additional clauses that may be relevant depending on the nature and scope of the service.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003e Frequently asked questions (FAQ)\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003e1. Can I edit the template myself?\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, the template comes in Word format that is easy to edit to suit your specific needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e2. Is the template legally binding?\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, the template is designed in accordance with Swedish legislation and is legally binding when it is correctly completed and signed by both parties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003e3. Do I need a lawyer to use this template?\u003c\/strong\u003e Even if the template is legally correct, it may be a good idea to have a lawyer review the agreement to ensure it meets all the specific requirements and expectations in your unique case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003e4. What happens if a dispute arises?\u003c\/strong\u003e The template includes a section on limitation of liability and dispute resolution that describes how disputes should be handled. It may be wise to include an arbitration or arbitration clause.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003e Tips for use\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eSpecify clearly:\u003c\/strong\u003e Be sure to specify all services to be provided as well as any expectations and terms of delivery.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDocument changes:\u003c\/strong\u003e If changes are made to the agreement after it has been signed, make sure these are documented in writing and signed by both parties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eUpdate regularly:\u003c\/strong\u003e Review and update the agreement regularly to ensure it continues to meet all legal requirements and business needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003e Relevant legislation and practice\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e The template is designed in accordance with Swedish legislation, including:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eContracts Act (1915:218):\u003c\/strong\u003e Regulates contract law and how contracts must be drawn up and interpreted.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eThe Consumer Services Act (1985:716):\u003c\/strong\u003e Applies to contracts for services that traders perform for consumers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eThe Personal Data Act (1998:204):\u003c\/strong\u003e Regulates how personal data must be handled, which is particularly relevant if the agreement involves the processing of personal data.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch4\u003e Final words\u003c\/h4\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003eThis services agreement template is an invaluable resource for business owners and service providers who want to ensure that their business relationships are clearly defined and legally protected. By using a professionally designed template, you can focus on delivering high quality services while knowing that your legal needs are well taken care of.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e Download your template today and start creating safe and clear contracts for your services.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c!----\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48245034844502,"sku":"7350139913171","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/AvtalfortjansterMallWordPDF.png?v=1718010979"},{"product_id":"samaganderattsavtal-mall","title":"Co-ownership agreement Template PDF\/Word","description":"\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eProduct Name:\u003c\/strong\u003e Joint Ownership Agreement Template (Word \u0026amp; PDF)\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eDescription:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003eWhen several individuals own a property or other property together, it is crucial to have a clear joint ownership agreement to avoid future conflicts and misunderstandings. Our co-ownership agreement template is created to help you and your co-owners establish rights and obligations in a simple and legally correct way. The template is available for immediate download in both Word and PDF formats, making it both flexible and easy to use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFeatures:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eFormat:\u003c\/strong\u003e Available in Word and PDF for easy editing and customization to your specific needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eDirect Download:\u003c\/strong\u003e Available for download immediately after purchase, giving you instant access to the document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eLegally correct:\u003c\/strong\u003e Designed to meet Swedish legal requirements and legal standards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eUser-friendly:\u003c\/strong\u003e Easy to fill out with clear instructions, saving you time and money on legal services.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eWhat is a co-ownership agreement?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e A co-ownership agreement is a legal document that regulates the management and ownership of joint property. Regardless of whether it concerns real estate, vehicles, boats or other property, the agreement ensures that all co-owners have clear and distinct guidelines to follow. It helps prevent conflicts by specifying each owner's share and their responsibilities for maintenance, expenses and any revenue.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eWhy is a joint ownership agreement important?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003eWithout a co-ownership agreement, significant problems can arise, especially if the co-owners do not agree. If there is no agreement, the law on co-ownership (1904:48 p.1) may be applied, which may lead to a forced sale of the property via the district court if agreement cannot be reached. By drawing up an agreement, you can agree to remove these provisions and instead determine your own rules that suit your specific situation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eContents of the template:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eThe parties:\u003c\/strong\u003e Includes details of all partners.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eThe property:\u003c\/strong\u003e Specifies which property is covered by the agreement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eOwnership shares:\u003c\/strong\u003e Determines each partner's ownership share.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eUse:\u003c\/strong\u003e Regulates how and when each co-owner may use the property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eRental:\u003c\/strong\u003e Determines whether and how the property may be rented out.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eManagement:\u003c\/strong\u003e Clarify responsibility for ongoing maintenance and management.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCosts and revenues:\u003c\/strong\u003e How costs should be shared and revenues allocated.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eSale:\u003c\/strong\u003e Terms for the sale of ownership shares or the entire property.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eSignatures:\u003c\/strong\u003e Space for all co-owners' signatures, which makes the agreement legally binding.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eCommon questions:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eWhat is a co-ownership agreement?\u003c\/strong\u003e A co-ownership agreement is an agreement between co-owners who own a property together. It specifies how ownership and management should be managed to avoid conflicts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eDoes the agreement need to be registered?\u003c\/strong\u003e No, a co-ownership agreement does not need to be registered with any authority, but it should be in writing and signed by all co-owners.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eCan the agreement be changed?\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, the agreement can be changed as long as all partners agree and the new terms are documented in writing and signed by all parties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat happens if we don't have an agreement?\u003c\/strong\u003e Without an agreement, the Joint Ownership Act applies, which means that co-owners who cannot agree can be forced to sell the property through the courts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eCan we create the agreement ourselves?\u003c\/strong\u003e Yes, our template is designed to be user-friendly and easy to complete, but it may be wise to seek legal advice to ensure all necessary clauses are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eTips for using the template:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eRead carefully:\u003c\/strong\u003e Make sure all partners understand the contents before you sign.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eAdapt as needed:\u003c\/strong\u003e Use the Word format to be able to easily adapt and edit the agreement according to your specific needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eKeep safe:\u003c\/strong\u003e After the agreement is signed, each partner should keep a copy in a safe place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e \u003cstrong\u003eLegislation and practice:\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n \u003cp\u003eThe Co-ownership Act (1904:48 s.1) is dispositive, which means that the co-owners can waive the provisions of the Act in whole or in part through a co-ownership agreement. This makes it possible to create your own rules that suit the specific conditions and needs of the property and the co-owners.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003c!----\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48245115781462,"sku":"7350139913164","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/SamaganderattsavtalMall.png?v=1718010526"},{"product_id":"samaganderattsavtal-mall-engelska-joint-ownership-agreement-template","title":"Joint Ownership Agreement – Swedish Law | English Word\/PDF + Swedish Reference + Guides","description":"\u003cdiv class=\"mb-product-copy\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint Ownership Agreement – English template governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/strong\u003e A structured, editable agreement for two or more co-owners who want to document their respective ownership shares, use of jointly owned property, management decisions, expenses, voluntary buy-outs and dispute procedures. The English agreement is the main template, accompanied by an English user guide, a Swedish reference agreement and a Swedish guide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish-language version governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/strong\u003e Not a UK or US legal document, a property conveyance, a substitute for a deed of transfer or a guarantee of enforceability in every case.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cdiv style=\"background:#f1f6f9;border-left:4px solid #2c5d7c;padding:15px 19px;margin:17px 0\"\u003e\n\n\u003cp style=\"margin:0\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eLegal framework checked: 8 October 2026.\u003c\/strong\u003e Designed based on the Joint Ownership Act (1904:48), relevant provisions of the Swedish Land Code, and guiding precedents from the Supreme Court.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included in the package?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ctable style=\"width:100%;border-collapse:collapse\"\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px;background:#edf3f6\"\u003eDocument\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\u003cth style=\"text-align:left;padding:9px;background:#edf3f6\"\u003ePurpose\u003c\/th\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5eaef\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish Joint Ownership Agreement\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5eaef\"\u003eEditable main agreement for use, shares, payments, decisions, transfers and dispute handling.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5eaef\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eEnglish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5eaef\"\u003eClause-by-clause instructions, examples, legal background and common mistakes.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5eaef\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eJoint Ownership Agreement – Swedish reference\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px;border-bottom:1px solid #e5eaef\"\u003eSwedish reference template for the same co-ownership arrangement.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSwedish User Guide\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\u003ctd style=\"padding:9px\"\u003eSwedish instructions and legal references.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e8 files total:\u003c\/strong\u003e each of the four documents is supplied as editable DOCX and searchable A4 PDF. The replacement 2027 ZIP is attached by the shop owner to the digital delivery separately; previously delivered files are retained.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho is this template for?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eThe agreement may be suitable when individuals already jointly own an identifiable asset and want practical rules for using and managing it. Examples include a jointly owned boat, vehicle, equipment or holiday property. Real property, housing co-operatives, spouses\/cohabitants and financed assets require additional legal checks because special rules can apply.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhen should you not use this template on its own?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTo buy, sell or give away a share in real property: the Swedish Land Code prescribes separate transfer formalities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTo replace a marriage property agreement, cohabitation agreement, estate distribution or corporate shareholders' agreement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eTo override lender rights, creditor enforcement, co-operative membership requirements or binding family-law rules.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFor disputed ownership, significant security interests, minors or international arrangements without appropriate professional review.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWhat can you regulate in a joint ownership agreement?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eCo-owners and shares:\u003c\/strong\u003e exact identification of owners, property and existing percentage shares (total 100%).\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eUse and bookings:\u003c\/strong\u003e permitted use, schedules, access, guests and any internal usage payment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eManagement:\u003c\/strong\u003e ordinary spending limits, consent thresholds and urgent preservation actions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eFinancial arrangements:\u003c\/strong\u003e costs, insurance, maintenance, budgeting, receipts and settlement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eVoluntary exit:\u003c\/strong\u003e written notice, internal offer process, valuation and buy-out procedure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003ePublic auction:\u003c\/strong\u003e an explicit choice whether to retain the statutory default or agree a clearly limited internal restriction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eDisputes:\u003c\/strong\u003e notification, opportunities to resolve disagreement, court proceedings and amendment rules.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eThe Swedish Joint Ownership Act: essential points\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eOwnership shares and management – sections 1–3\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder section 1, shares are presumed equal unless another distribution can be demonstrated. Under section 2, management and disposal of the entire jointly held asset ordinarily require the consent of all owners; a narrow urgent-preservation exception applies. Under section 3, a court may appoint a manager in cases of disagreement about management or use. Actual ownership and authority toward third parties must be established separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003ePublic auction – sections 6–9\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eUnder section 6 of the Joint Ownership Act, a co-owner can generally apply for sale by public auction unless the co-owners have validly agreed otherwise. Another co-owner may demonstrate exceptionally strong reasons for postponement. The template includes \u003cstrong\u003etwo mutually exclusive alternatives\u003c\/strong\u003e that must be resolved before signing; a limitation agreed among co-owners is not necessarily effective against creditors or enforcement applicants. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.domstol.se\/hogsta-domstolen\/avgoranden2\/2007\/39564\/\"\u003eNJA 2007 s. 455\u003c\/a\u003e illustrates this limitation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eA contractual arrangement concerning a court-appointed manager should also be considered carefully. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.domstol.se\/hogsta-domstolen\/avgoranden2\/2019\/42979\/\"\u003eNJA 2019 s. 1055\u003c\/a\u003e concerns an exclusion of section 3 without a workable replacement mechanism.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCosts are not automatically joint and several liability\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eSection 15 addresses allocation of expenses incurred under the Joint Ownership Act for management or auction in proportion to shares. It should not be described as a universal rule making every co-owner jointly and severally liable for all maintenance bills. Agreements with banks and suppliers are assessed separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow to complete the English agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003col\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eOpen the English DOCX and identify every co-owner and the property using reliable ownership records.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEnter actual ownership shares and confirm the total equals 100%.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSet a manager if appropriate and clearly distinguish ordinary spending from decisions requiring all owners' consent.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSpecify booking\/use rules, annual budget, insurance arrangements and payment deadlines.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eDefine a realistic internal notice process and a valuation procedure for voluntary transfers; check separate statutory formalities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003cstrong\u003eChoose one\u003c\/strong\u003e of the public-auction alternatives and delete the other.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eSet dispute-resolution deadlines, complete schedules, remove unfilled placeholders and have the parties sign.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eRetain signed files, title evidence, insurance details and financial records securely.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ol\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eExample of an internal cost agreement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eTwo people jointly own a boat: one holds 60%, the other 40%. They may agree that insurance is paid 60\/40, fuel is paid by the actual user, repairs over SEK 5,000 require both owners' approval and use is booked through a shared calendar. These are illustrations of possible private arrangements, not mandatory default rules for every asset.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCommon mistakes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eUsing the agreement as if it transferred legal title.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eEntering unsupported ownership percentages or forgetting other registered owners.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAllowing one owner to sign for others without appropriate authority.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eIncluding a supposed right of first refusal without considering form requirements or third-party rights.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eAssuming that an agreed no-auction clause binds enforcement creditors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003eFailing to consider mortgages, insurance, family-law rights or co-operative rules.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eVanliga frågor – FAQ\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the template a joint ownership agreement in English according to Swedish law?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The English main agreement and its guide are based on Swedish law. The package also includes a separate Swedish reference template and a Swedish user guide.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan an owner request that jointly owned property be sold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOften yes, under section 6 of the Swedish Joint Ownership Act, unless a valid agreement provides otherwise and subject to the statutory requirements. A private restriction does not necessarily protect against creditor enforcement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes this agreement automatically transfer ownership?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Ownership transfers must be assessed and documented separately; real-property transactions have specific statutory form requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan we arrange contributions differently from ownership percentages?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eOwners can in many situations agree on an internal cost allocation. External liabilities to lenders, suppliers or authorities must be evaluated separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDo all co-owners need to sign?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eFor the intended agreement to cover all owners, each affected co-owner should validly consent and sign. Check representation authority and any special requirements relevant to the asset.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the English version valid in the UK or US?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003eIt is intended for Swedish law, not as a general UK or US agreement. A foreign legal assessment may be necessary for cross-border use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eRelated Mallbutiken templates\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003ePrefer a Swedish-language primary document? See \u003ca href=\"\/en\/products\/samaganderattsavtal-mall\"\u003eSamäganderättsavtal – svensk huvudprodukt\u003c\/a\u003e. This English-first page is written primarily for customers seeking an English joint ownership agreement governed by Swedish law.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eLegal sources and limitations\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\n\u003cul\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/lag-190448-s-1-om-samaganderatt_sfs-1904-48%20s.1\"\u003eLag (1904:48 s. 1) om samäganderätt\u003c\/a\u003e, particularly sections 1–3, 6–9 and 15.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.riksdagen.se\/sv\/dokument-och-lagar\/dokument\/svensk-forfattningssamling\/jordabalk-1970994_sfs-1970-994\/\"\u003eJordabalken (1970:994)\u003c\/a\u003e, Chapter 4 for real-property transfers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\u003cli\u003e\n\n\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.domstol.se\/hogsta-domstolen\/avgoranden2\/2007\/39564\/\"\u003eHögsta domstolen, NJA 2007 s. 455\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.domstol.se\/hogsta-domstolen\/avgoranden2\/2019\/42979\/\"\u003eNJA 2019 s. 1055\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003csmall\u003e2027 edition. Legal framework checked 8 October 2026. This is a general documentation and drafting aid, not tailored legal, financial, tax or real-property advice. No absolute guarantee is made regarding validity, enforcement, third-party effects or suitability for particular circumstances.\u003c\/small\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48245123940694,"sku":"7350139913157","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/joint-ownership-agreement-english-hero-2027_45bb0716-fc02-4ebc-ad5c-faee8ad1e7e6.png?v=1791427782"},{"product_id":"fullmakt-att-inga-avtal-mall-word-pdf","title":"Power of Attorney to Enter into Agreements Template – Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower of Attorney to Enter into Agreements – Word\/PDF\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis power of attorney template is intended for individuals and businesses that need to authorise a representative to negotiate, enter into or sign agreements on their behalf within a defined scope. The template is designed for use under Swedish law and is supplied in Word and PDF.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat the template helps you define\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe principal granting the authority,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe authorised representative,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ewhich agreements the representative may negotiate or sign,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003efinancial, contractual or other limits on the authority,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe period of validity,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003esignatures and practical instructions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDefine the authority clearly\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA power of attorney should make it clear what the representative is authorised to do. If the mandate is limited to a specific contract type, transaction value, counterparty or time period, those limits should be stated expressly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSuitable for business and private matters\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be adapted for commercial agreements, procurement, service agreements, purchases and other situations where another person needs authority to contract on the principal's behalf.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eBefore signing\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck whether the intended counterparty, bank, authority or other recipient requires a particular form, original document, identification procedure or additional corporate authorisation. A company should also ensure that the person granting the power has authority to do so.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFormat and delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e Word (DOCX) and PDF.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLegal context:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish law.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download; no physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template is general documentation support and does not replace individual legal advice for complex, high-value or regulated transactions.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48270103183702,"sku":"7350139913232","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/Fullmaktattingaavtal-Mall.png?v=1718295465"},{"product_id":"fullmakt-att-inga-avtal-engelska-mall-power-of-attorney-to-enter-into-agreements","title":"Power of Attorney to Enter into Agreements (English) – Swedish Law","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower of Attorney to Enter into Agreements (English) – Swedish Law\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis English-language power of attorney template is designed for individuals and businesses that need to authorise another person to negotiate, enter into or sign agreements on their behalf in a Swedish legal context.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat the template helps define\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe principal granting the authority,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe authorised representative,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ewhich contracts or transactions are covered,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003efinancial or contractual limits,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe period of validity,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eapplicable instructions and signatures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eSet clear limits\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe mandate should be precise enough for the representative and the counterparty to understand what may be done. If authority is limited to a particular agreement, counterparty, transaction value or time period, state that clearly in the final document.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFor business and private use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe template can be adapted for commercial contracts, service arrangements, purchases and other situations where a representative needs authority to contract in the principal's name. Companies should also ensure that the person granting the authority is entitled to bind the company.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCheck recipient requirements\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA bank, authority, contractual counterparty or other recipient may require a particular form, original document, identification process or corporate authorisation. Verify those requirements before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFormat and delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e Word (DOCX) and PDF.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLanguage:\u003c\/strong\u003e English.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLegal context:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish law.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download; no physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eThis template is general documentation support and does not replace individual legal advice for complex or high-value transactions.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48270132117846,"sku":"7350139913249","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/FullmaktattingaavtalMall_Engelska_PowerofAttorneytoEnterintoAgreements.png?v=1718295934"},{"product_id":"fullmakt-domstols-och-myndighetsarenden-mall-word-pdf","title":"Power of Attorney for Court and Government Authority Matters – Word\/PDF","description":"\u003cdiv\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePower of Attorney for Court and Government Authority Matters – Word\/PDF\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis power of attorney template is intended for situations where a person needs to authorise a representative to act on their behalf in specified court, administrative or government-authority matters in Sweden.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat the power of attorney can specify\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe principal and representative,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ethe court, authority or matter covered,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ewhich documents may be submitted or received,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ewhether the representative may sign or make statements,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003elimits and conditions on the authority,\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eperiod of validity and signatures.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDefine the mandate precisely\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe scope of the authority should be written clearly so that the representative and the recipient understand what actions are authorised. Avoid granting broader powers than necessary for the intended matter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCheck court or authority requirements\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome proceedings and authorities use their own forms or require original documents, identification, special wording or other supporting material. The template should therefore be adapted to the specific recipient and process.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFormat and delivery\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eFormats:\u003c\/strong\u003e Word (DOCX) and PDF.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLegal context:\u003c\/strong\u003e Swedish law.\u003cbr\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDelivery:\u003c\/strong\u003e digital download; no physical product is shipped.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cem\u003eThe template is general documentation support. Procedural rules and authority-specific requirements may require additional documents or professional advice.\u003c\/em\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/div\u003e","brand":"Svenska Dokumentmallar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":48272682582358,"sku":"7350139913256","price":49.0,"currency_code":"SEK","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0827\/2373\/3846\/files\/FullmaktDomstolsochMyndighetsarendenMall.png?v=1718324335"}],"url":"https:\/\/mallbutiken.se\/en\/collections\/mallar-for-aktiebolag.oembed?page=12","provider":"Mallbutiken","version":"1.0","type":"link"}